ABB RELION 620 Series Technical Manual
Hide thumbs Also See for RELION 620 Series:
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

RELION® PROTECTION AND CONTROL
620 series ANSI
Technical Manual

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Summary of Contents for ABB RELION 620 Series

  • Page 1 — RELION® PROTECTION AND CONTROL 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 3 Document ID: 1MAC504801-IB Issued: 2019-05-29 Revision: E Product version: 2.0 and 2.1 © Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved...
  • Page 4 Copyright This document and parts thereof must not be reproduced or copied without written permission from ABB, and the contents thereof must not be imparted to a third party, nor used for any unauthorized purpose. The software or hardware described in this document is furnished under a license and may be used, copied, or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of such license.
  • Page 5 ABB is not liable for any such damages and/or losses.
  • Page 6 (Low-voltage directive 2014/35/EU). This conformity is the result of tests conducted by ABB in accordance with the product standards EN 50263 and EN 60255-26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standards EN 60255-1 and EN 60255-27 for the low voltage directive.
  • Page 7: Table Of Contents

    Table of contents Table of contents Section 1 Introduction................29 This manual.................... 29 Intended audience.................. 29 Product documentation................30 Product documentation set..............30 Document revision history..............30 Related documentation..............31 Symbols and conventions...............31 Symbols.....................31 Document conventions..............32 Functions, codes and symbols............33 Section 2 620 series overview.............41 Overview....................41 Product series version history............
  • Page 8 Table of contents Functionality..................69 Signals....................73 Settings....................74 Monitored data...................77 LED indication control................78 Time synchronization................79 Parameter setting groups............... 80 Function block................... 80 Functionality..................81 Fault records...................82 Non-volatile memory................87 Binary input.....................88 Binary input filter time................ 88 Binary input inversion................ 89 Oscillation suppression..............89 Binary outputs..................90 Power output contacts ..............
  • Page 9 Table of contents RTD temperature vs. resistance..........104 RTD/mA input connection............105 RTD/mA card variants..............105 Signals.....................109 Settings....................110 Monitored data.................111 GOOSE function blocks................112 GOOSERCV_BIN function block............. 113 Function block................113 Functionality................113 Signals..................113 GOOSERCV_DP function block............114 Function block................114 Functionality................114 Signals..................114 GOOSERCV_MV function block............114 Function block................
  • Page 10 Table of contents QTY_GOOD function block............. 119 Functionality................119 Signals..................120 QTY_BAD function block..............120 Functionality................120 Signals..................120 QTY_GOOSE_COMM function block..........121 Functionality................121 Signals..................121 T_HEALTH function block............... 121 Functionality................121 Signals..................122 T_F32_INT8 function block..............122 Functionality................122 Function block................122 Settings..................122 Configurable logic blocks..............123 Standard configurable logic blocks..........123 OR function block...............
  • Page 11 Table of contents Settings....................136 Monitored data.................138 Section 4 Protection functions............139 Current protection................. 139 Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection 51P/50P..139 Identification................139 Function block................139 Functionality................139 Operation principle..............140 Measurement modes..............143 Timer characteristics..............143 Application.................. 145 Signals..................152 Settings..................153 Monitored data................156 Technical data................
  • Page 12 Table of contents Non-directional neutral overcurrent protection 51N/50N and Non-directional ground fault protection 51G/50G......188 Identification................188 Function block................188 Functionality................188 Operation principle..............189 Measurement modes..............191 Timer characteristics..............191 Application.................. 193 Signals..................193 Settings..................194 Monitored data................197 Technical data................198 Directional earth-fault protection 67/51N and 67/50N..... 198 Identification................
  • Page 13 Table of contents Identification................234 Function block................234 Functionality................234 Operation principle..............234 Application.................. 236 Signals..................237 Settings..................237 Monitored data................239 Technical data................239 Phase discontinuity protection 46PD..........239 Identification................239 Function block................240 Functionality................240 Operation principle..............240 Application.................. 242 Signals..................243 Settings..................244 Monitored data................244 Technical data................
  • Page 14 Table of contents Loss of load supervision 37M............255 Identification................255 Function block................255 Functionality................255 Operation principle..............255 Application.................. 257 Signals..................257 Settings..................258 Monitored data................258 Technical data................258 Motor load jam protection 51LR............259 Identification................259 Function block................259 Functionality................259 Operation principle..............
  • Page 15 Table of contents Monitored data................274 Technical data................274 Three-phase undervoltage protection 27.........275 Identification................275 Function block................275 Functionality................275 Operation principle..............275 Timer characteristics..............279 Application.................. 279 Signals..................280 Settings..................281 Monitored data................282 Technical data................282 Residual overvoltage protection 59G/N...........282 Identification................282 Function block................
  • Page 16 Table of contents Settings..................294 Monitored data................294 Technical data................295 Voltage per hertz protection 24............295 Identification................295 Function block................296 Functionality................296 Operation principle..............296 Timer characteristics..............300 Application.................. 305 Signals..................310 Settings..................311 Monitored data................312 Technical data................313 Three-phase remnant undervoltage protection 27R......313 Identification................
  • Page 17 Table of contents Application.................. 334 Signals..................337 Settings..................338 Monitored data................338 Technical data................339 Power protection...................339 Three-phase directional power protection 32P........339 Identification................339 Function block................339 Functionality................339 Operation principle..............340 Application.................. 342 Signals..................342 Settings..................342 Monitored data................343 Ground directional power protection 32N........343 Identification................
  • Page 18 Table of contents Signals..................364 Settings..................365 Monitored data................366 Technical data................366 Power factor 55................366 Identification................366 Function block................367 Functionality................367 Operation principle..............367 Application.................. 370 Signals..................371 Settings..................372 Monitored data................373 Technical data................373 Thermal protection................373 Three-phase thermal protection for feeders, cables and distribution transformers 49F............
  • Page 19 Table of contents Functionality................389 Operation principle..............389 Application.................. 398 Signals..................402 Settings..................403 Monitored data................404 Technical data................404 Differential protection................404 Motor differential protection 87M............. 404 Identification................404 Function block................405 Functionality................405 Operation principle..............405 Application.................. 411 Signals..................419 Settings..................419 Monitored data................420 Technical data................
  • Page 20 Table of contents Monitored data................466 Technical data................466 High-impedance differential protection 87........466 Identification................466 Function block................467 Functionality................467 Operation principle..............467 Application.................. 469 Current transformer requirements for differential protection ..478 Example calculations for busbar high-impedance differential protection..................483 Signals..................486 Settings..................487 Monitored data................487 Technical data................
  • Page 21 Table of contents Operation principle..............514 Application.................. 517 Base values................520 Signals..................520 Settings..................521 Monitored data................522 Technical data................522 Section 5 Protection-related functions..........525 Three-phase inrush detector INR............525 Identification..................525 Function block................. 525 Functionality..................525 Operation principle................526 Application..................527 Signals.....................528 Settings....................529 Monitored data.................529 Technical data.................
  • Page 22 Table of contents Function block ................544 Functionality..................545 Operation principle................545 Application..................547 Signals.....................548 Settings....................548 Monitored data.................549 Arc protection AFD................549 Identification..................549 Function block................. 549 Functionality..................549 Operation principle................550 Application..................551 Signals.....................555 Settings....................556 Monitored data.................556 Technical data................. 556 RTD based thermal protection 38............557 Identification..................
  • Page 23 Table of contents Circuit breaker spring-charged indication........570 Gas pressure supervision............571 Application..................571 Signals.....................574 Settings....................576 Monitored data.................577 Technical data................. 577 Trip circuit supervision TCM..............578 Identification..................578 Function block................. 578 Functionality ................... 578 Operation principle................578 Application..................579 Signals.....................587 Settings....................588 Monitored data.................588 Current circuit supervision CCM............
  • Page 24 Table of contents Application..................607 Signals.....................608 Settings....................608 Monitored data.................609 Technical data................. 609 Motor start-up supervision 66/51LRS........... 609 Identification..................609 Function block................. 610 Functionality..................610 Operation principle................610 Application..................616 Signals.....................620 Settings....................620 Monitored data.................621 Technical data................. 622 Cable fault detection CFD..............622 Identification..................
  • Page 25 Table of contents Identification................640 Function block................640 Signals..................641 Settings..................641 Monitored data................642 Technical data................643 Three-phase voltage measurement VA, VB, VC......643 Identification................643 Function block................643 Signals..................643 Settings..................644 Monitored data................644 Technical data................645 Residual current measurement IG...........645 Identification................645 Function block................
  • Page 26 Table of contents Monitored data................653 Technical data................653 Three-phase power and energy measurement P, E......653 Identification................653 Function block................653 Signals..................654 Settings..................654 Monitored data................655 Technical data................656 Single-phase power and energy measurement SP, SE....656 Identification................656 Function block................656 Signals..................656 Settings..................657 Monitored data................657...
  • Page 27 Table of contents Application..................670 Signals.....................671 Settings....................672 Monitored data.................672 Voltage total harmonic distortion PQVPH..........673 Identification..................673 Function block................. 673 Functionality..................673 Operation principle................673 Application..................674 Signals.....................674 Settings....................675 Monitored data.................675 Voltage variation PQSS................ 676 Identification..................676 Function block................. 676 Functionality..................676 Operation principle................
  • Page 28 Table of contents Circuit-breaker control 52..............705 Identification..................705 Function block................. 705 Functionality..................705 Operation principle................706 Application..................709 Signals.....................710 Settings....................710 Monitored data.................711 Autoreclosing 79................... 711 Identification..................711 Function block................. 712 Functionality..................712 Protection signal definition............712 Zone coordination...............713 Master and slave scheme............713 Thermal overload blocking............
  • Page 29 Table of contents Functionality..................752 Operation principle................752 Application..................761 Signals.....................763 Settings....................764 Monitored data.................765 Technical data................. 766 Generic up-down counters CTR............766 Identification..................766 Function block................. 766 Functionality..................766 Operation principle................767 Signals.....................768 Settings....................768 Monitored data.................768 Emergency start-up 62EST..............769 Identification..................
  • Page 30 Table of contents Application..................780 Settings....................781 Monitored data.................784 Fault location FLO................784 Identification..................784 Function block................. 784 Functionality..................785 Operation principle................785 Application..................788 Settings....................789 Monitored data.................790 Section 11 Other functions..............791 Minimum pulse timer................791 Minimum pulse timer TP..............791 Identification................
  • Page 31 Table of contents Functionality..................798 Signals.....................798 Settings....................798 Pulse timer PT..................798 Identification..................798 Function block................. 799 Functionality..................799 Signals.....................799 Settings....................800 Technical data................. 800 Generic control points CNTRL..............801 Identification..................801 Function block................. 801 Functionality..................801 Operation principle................801 Signals.....................802 Settings....................804 Remote generic control points RCNTRL..........806 Identification..................
  • Page 32 Table of contents Functionality..................819 Signals.....................819 Settings....................820 Technical data................. 820 Time delay on TON................820 Identification..................820 Function block................. 821 Functionality..................821 Signals.....................821 Settings....................822 Technical data................. 822 Three-phase measurement switching VSWI........823 Identification..................823 Function block................. 823 Functionality..................823 Signals.....................824 Monitored data.................824 Section 12 General function block features.........825 Definite time characteristics..............825 Definite time operation..............825...
  • Page 33 Table of contents Measurement modes................875 Calculated measurements..............877 Section 13 Requirements for measurement transformers....879 Current transformers................879 Current transformer requirements for non-directional overcurrent protection..................879 Current transformer accuracy class and accuracy limit factor..879 Non-directional overcurrent protection........880 Example for non-directional overcurrent protection....882 Current transformer requirements for differential protections..
  • Page 35: Section 1 Introduction

    Section 1 1MAC504801-IB E Introduction Section 1 Introduction This manual The technical manual contains application and functionality descriptions and lists function blocks, logic diagrams, input and output signals, setting parameters and technical data sorted per function. The manual can be used as a technical reference during the engineering phase, installation and commissioning phase, and during normal service.
  • Page 36: Product Documentation

    Cyber security deployment guideline GUID-06ED1128-B7CA-43DC-83B2-24A31B78D460 V1 EN Figure 1: The intended use of documents during the product life cycle Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded from the ABB Web site http://www.abb.com/relion. 1.3.2 Document revision history Document revision/date Product series version...
  • Page 37: Related Documentation

    Introduction Download the latest documents from the ABB Web site http://www.abb.com/substationautomation. 1.3.3 Related documentation Product series- and product-specific manuals can be downloaded from the ABB Web site http://www.abb.com/substationautomation. Symbols and conventions 1.4.1 Symbols The electrical warning icon indicates the presence of a hazard which could result in electrical shock.
  • Page 38: Document Conventions

    Section 1 1MAC504801-IB E Introduction 1.4.2 Document conventions A particular convention may not be used in this manual. • Abbreviations and acronyms are spelled out in the glossary. The glossary also contains definitions of important terms. • Push button navigation in the LHMI menu structure is presented by using the push button icons.
  • Page 39: Functions, Codes And Symbols

    Section 1 1MAC504801-IB E Introduction GUID-D30997A9-9AE3-4457-89E6-FC06B643F99B V1 EN Figure 3: Function block in Application Configuration 1.4.3 Functions, codes and symbols All available functions are listed in the table. All of them may not be applicable to all products. Table 1: Functions included in the relays ANSI/C37.2 -2008 Function...
  • Page 40 Section 1 1MAC504801-IB E Introduction ANSI/C37.2 -2008 Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 REF620 REM620 RET620 Non-directional earth-fault protection, high stage, instance 2 EFHPTOC2 Io>> (2) 50G-2 50G-2 Non-directional earth-fault protection, high stage, instance 3 EFHPTOC3 Io>> (3) 50N-1 50N-1 (1) Non-directional earth-fault protection, high stage, instance 4 EFHPTOC4 Io>>...
  • Page 41 Section 1 1MAC504801-IB E Introduction ANSI/C37.2 -2008 Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 REF620 REM620 RET620 Three-phase directional overpower protection, instance 3 DOPPDPR3 P> (3) 32O-3 Three-phase directional underpower protection, instance 1 DUPPDPR1 P< (1) 32U-1 Three-phase directional underpower protection, instance 2 DUPPDPR2 P<...
  • Page 42 Section 1 1MAC504801-IB E Introduction ANSI/C37.2 -2008 Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 REF620 REM620 RET620 Load shedding and restoration, instance 3 LSHDPFRQ3 UFLS/R (3) 81LSH-3(1) Load shedding and restoration, instance 4 LSHDPFRQ4 UFLS/R (4) 81LSH-4(1) Load shedding and restoration, instance 5 LSHDPFRQ5 UFLS/R (5) 81LSH-1(2)
  • Page 43 Section 1 1MAC504801-IB E Introduction ANSI/C37.2 -2008 Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 REF620 REM620 RET620 Circuit-breaker condition monitoring, instance 3 SSCBR3 CBCM (3) 52CM (3) Trip circuit supervision, instance 1 TCSSCBR1 TCS (1) TCM-1 TCM-1 TCM-1 Trip circuit supervision, instance 2 TCSSCBR2 TCS (2) TCM-2...
  • Page 44 Section 1 1MAC504801-IB E Introduction ANSI/C37.2 -2008 Function IEC 61850 IEC 60617 REF620 REM620 RET620 Pulse timer (8 pcs), instance 1 PTGAPC1 PT (1) PT-1 PT-1 PT-1 Pulse timer (8 pcs), instance 2 PTGAPC2 PT (2) PT-2 PT-2 PT-2 Time delay off (8 pcs), instance 1 TOFGAPC1 TOF (1) TOF-1...
  • Page 45 Section 1 1MAC504801-IB E Introduction 3) Function has been added in 620 series Ver.2.1 ANSI 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 47: Section 2 620 Series Overview

    IED Connectivity Package REF620 ANSI Ver.2.0 or later • IED Connectivity Package REM620 ANSI Ver.2.1 or later • IED Connectivity Package RET620 ANSI Ver.2.0 or later Download connectivity packages from the ABB web site http://www.abb.com/substationautomation 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 48: Local Hmi

    Section 2 1MAC504801-IB E 620 series overview Local HMI The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling the protection relay. The LHMI comprises the display, buttons, LED indicators and communication port. GUID-C45202F5-7D53-421F-8245-4AEAFC3D13B2 V1 EN Figure 4: Example of the LHMI 2.2.1 Display The LHMI includes a graphical display that supports one character size.
  • Page 49: Leds

    Section 2 1MAC504801-IB E 620 series overview A070705-ANSI V3 EN Figure 5: Display layout 1 Header 2 Icon 3 Content 4 Scroll bar (displayed when needed) 2.2.2 LEDs The LHMI includes three protection indicators above the display: Normal, Pickup and Trip.
  • Page 50: Programmable Push Buttons With Leds

    Section 2 1MAC504801-IB E 620 series overview A071176-ANSI V1 EN Figure 6: LHMI keypad with object control, navigation and command push buttons and RJ-45 communication port 2.2.4 Programmable push buttons with LEDs GUID-4D43320C-F429-4BD6-BECE-1CE6F6F94C30 V1 EN Figure 7: Programmable push buttons with LEDs The LHMI keypad on the left side of the protection relay contains 16 programmable push buttons with red LEDs.
  • Page 51: Web Hmi

    Section 2 1MAC504801-IB E 620 series overview The buttons and LEDs are freely programmable, and they can be configured both for operation and acknowledgement purposes. That way, it is possible to get acknowledgements of the executed actions associated with the buttons. This combination can be useful, for example, for quickly selecting or changing a setting group, selecting or operating equipment, indicating field contact status or indicating or acknowledging individual alarms.
  • Page 52: Authorization

    Section 2 1MAC504801-IB E 620 series overview GUID-29D55F02-2B5A-403A-86B3-A982384761F0-ANSI V1 EN Figure 8: Example view of the WHMI The WHMI can be accessed locally and remotely. • Locally by connecting the laptop to the protection relay via the front communication port. •...
  • Page 53: Audit Trail

    Section 2 1MAC504801-IB E 620 series overview Table 3: Predefined user categories Username User rights VIEWER Read only access OPERATOR • Selecting remote or local state with (only locally) • Changing setting groups • Controlling • Clearing indications ENGINEER • Changing settings •...
  • Page 54 Section 2 1MAC504801-IB E 620 series overview The logging is based on predefined user names or user categories. The user audit trail events are accessible with IEC 61850-8-1, PCM600, LHMI and WHMI. Table 4: Audit trail events Audit trail event Description Configuration change Configuration files changed...
  • Page 55: Communication

    Section 2 1MAC504801-IB E 620 series overview To expose the audit trail events through Event list, define the Authority logging level parameter via Configuration/Authorization/Security. This exposes audit trail events to all users. Table 5: Comparison of authority logging levels Audit trail event Authority logging level Configuratio Setting...
  • Page 56: Self-Healing Ethernet Ring

    Section 2 1MAC504801-IB E 620 series overview The protection relay utilizes Ethernet communication extensively for different purposes. The exact services depend on the ordered product variant and enabled functionality. Table 6: TCP and UDP ports used for different services Service Port IEC 61850 MODBUS...
  • Page 57: Ethernet Redundancy

    Section 2 1MAC504801-IB E 620 series overview same external switch or to two adjacent external switches. A self-healing Ethernet ring requires a communication module with at least two Ethernet interfaces for all protection relays. Client A Client B Network A Network B Managed Ethernet switch Managed Ethernet switch...
  • Page 58 Section 2 1MAC504801-IB E 620 series overview time, thus fulfilling the stringent real-time requirements for the substation automation horizontal communication and time synchronization. PRP specifies that each device is connected in parallel to two local area networks. HSR applies the PRP principle to rings and to the rings of rings to achieve cost-effective redundancy.
  • Page 59 Section 2 1MAC504801-IB E 620 series overview In case a laptop or a PC workstation is connected as a non-PRP node to one of the PRP networks, LAN A or LAN B, it is recommended to use a redundancy box device or an Ethernet switch with similar functionality between the PRP network and SAN to remove additional PRP information from the Ethernet frames.
  • Page 60 Section 2 1MAC504801-IB E 620 series overview GUID-207430A7-3AEC-42B2-BC4D-3083B3225990 V3 EN Figure 11: HSR solution LAN A of one device should connect to LAN B in the next device in the ring. Do not connect LAN A to LAN A or LAN B to LAN B. 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 61: Section 3 Basic Functions

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Section 3 Basic functions General parameters Table 7: Analog input settings, phase currents Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Secondary current 2=1A 3=5A Rated secondary current 3=5A Primary current 1.0...6000.0 600.0 Rated primary current Amplitude corr.
  • Page 62 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Amplitude corr. B 0.900...1.100 0.001 1.000 Phase B Voltage phasor magnitude correction of an external voltage transformer Amplitude corr. C 0.900...1.100 0.001 1.000 Phase C Voltage phasor magnitude correction of an external voltage transformer Voltage input type 1=Voltage trafo...
  • Page 63 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions To avoid communication errors with PCM600 while authentication is enabled, ensure that appropriate credentials are used for the specific action. Confirm that the password in the IED properties is valid for the action attempted. Table 12: Binary input settings Parameter...
  • Page 64 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Table 16: DIAGLCCH1 Output signals Name Values Description CHLIV True Status of LAN A in HSR and PRP mode. When switch is False in “HSR” or “PRP” mode, value is “True” if the protection relay is receiving supervision frames from LAN A.
  • Page 65 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Table 19: HMI settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description FB naming convention 1=IEC61850 4=ANSI FB naming convention used in protection relay 2=IEC60617 3=ANSI Default view 1=Measurements 3=SLD LHMI default view 2=Main menu 3=SLD Backlight timeout 1...60...
  • Page 66 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Link mode 2 1=RTU 1=RTU Modbus link mode on Serial interface 2 2=ASCII Start delay 2 0...20 Start frame delay in chars on Serial interface 2 End delay 2 0...20 End frame delay in chars on Serial interface 2 MaxTCPClients...
  • Page 67 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Data link confirm 0=Never 0=Never Data link confirm mode 1=Only Multiframe 2=Always Data link confirm TO 100...65535 3000 Data link confirm timeout Data link retries 0...65535 Data link retries count Data link Rx to Tx delay 0...255 Turnaround transmission delay...
  • Page 68 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions If this protocol does not operate as expected, check that another serial protocol is not using the same COM port. DNP3 protocol ignores any parity setting in the COM settings group; DNP3 is defined as an 8 bit/no parity protocol with a 16-bit CRC every 16 bytes.
  • Page 69 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Local time offset -720...720 -300 Local time offset in minutes. Set to the number of minutes difference between UTC and Local Time (e.g. -300 for the Eastern U.S) if the local time sync source delivers time in UTC.
  • Page 70: Self-Supervision

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Table 27: Binary output signals in card location Xnnn Name Type Default Description See the application manual for terminal 1)2) Xnnn-Pmm BOOLEAN 0=False connections 1) Xnnn = Slot ID, for example, X100, X110, as applicable 2) Pmm = For example, PO1, PO2, SO1, SO2, as applicable Table 28: Binary input settings in card location Xnnn...
  • Page 71 Figure 12: Output contact The internal fault code indicates the type of internal relay fault. When a fault appears, record the code so that it can be reported to ABB customer service. Table 29: Internal fault indications and codes Fault indication...
  • Page 72 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Fault indication Fault code Additional information Internal Fault Faulty Signal Output relay(s) in card SO-relay(s),X115 located in slot X115 Internal Fault Faulty Signal Output relay(s) in card SO-relay(s),X100 located in slot X100 Internal Fault Faulty Signal Output relay(s) in card SO-relay(s),X110 located in slot X110...
  • Page 73: Warnings

    LHMI. The warning indication message can be manually cleared. If a warning appears, record the name and code so that it can be provided to ABB customer service. 620 series ANSI...
  • Page 74 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Table 30: Warning indications and codes Warning indication Warning code Additional information Warning An internal system error has occurred. System warning Warning A watchdog reset has occurred. Watchdog reset Warning The auxiliary supply voltage has dropped Power down det.
  • Page 75: Programmable Leds

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Warning indication Warning code Additional information Warning Temporary error occurred in RTD card RTD card error,X110 located in slot X110 Warning Temporary error occurred in RTD card RTD card error,X130 located in slot X130. Warning Measurement error in RTD card located in RTD measurement error...
  • Page 76 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions GUID-C45202F5-7D53-421F-8245-4AEAFC3D13B2 V1 EN Figure 14: Programmable LEDs on the right side of the display All the programmable LEDs in the HMI of the protection relay have two colors, green and red. For each LED, the different colors are individually controllable. For example: LEDx is green when AR is in progress and red when AR is locked out.
  • Page 77 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Programmable LEDs General Alarm color Green LED 1 Alarm mode LED 2 Description Follow-S Follow-F Latched-S LatchedAck-F-S Programmable LED description GUID-0DED5640-4F67-4112-9A54-E8CAADFFE547 V1 EN Figure 15: Menu structure Alarm mode alternatives The different alternatives for Alarm mode are "Follow-S", "Follow-F", "Latched-S" and "LatchedAck-F-S".
  • Page 78 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions "Follow-F": Follow Signal, Flashing Similar to "Follow-S", but instead the LED is flashing when the input is active, Non- latched. "Latched-S": Latched, ON This mode is a latched function. At the activation of the input signal, the alarm shows a steady light.
  • Page 79: Signals

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.3.4 Signals Table 31: Input signals Name Type Default Description X130-SO1 BOOLEAN 0=False Connectors 9c-10nc-11no X130-SO2 BOOLEAN 0=False Connectors 12c-13nc-14no X130-SO3 BOOLEAN 0=False Trip output with TCS, Connectors 16-17 Table 32: LED Input signals Name Type Default...
  • Page 80: Settings

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 10 ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False Alarm input for LED 10 RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for LED 10 BOOLEAN 0=False Ok input for LED 11 ALARM BOOLEAN 0=False...
  • Page 81 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Input minimum 0...2000 Minimum analogue input value for mA or resistance scaling Value unit 1=Dimensionless 1=Dimensionless Selected unit for output value format 5=Ampere 23=Degrees celsius 30=Ohm Value maximum -10000.0...10000.0 10000.0 Maximum output value for scaling and...
  • Page 82 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Table 34: Programmable LED Settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Alarm colour 1=Green 2=Red Colour for the alarm 2=Red state of the LED Alarm mode 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for 0=Follow-S programmable LED 1 1=Follow-F 2=Latched-S 3=LatchedAck-F-S...
  • Page 83: Monitored Data

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for 1=Follow-F programmable LED 8 2=Latched-S 3=LatchedAck-F-S Description Programmable LEDs Programmable LED LED 8 description Alarm mode 0=Follow-S 0=Follow-S Alarm mode for 1=Follow-F programmable LED 9 2=Latched-S...
  • Page 84: Led Indication Control

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description AI_DB3 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 RTD input, Connectors 6-8, reported value AI_RANGE3 Enum 0=normal RTD input, Connectors 6-8, 1=high range 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low Programmable LED Enum 0=None Status of programmable LED 1=Ok 3=Alarm Programmable LED...
  • Page 85: Time Synchronization

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions LED indication control should never be used for tripping purposes. There is a separate trip logic function TRPPTRC available in the relay configuration. LED indication control is preconfigured in a such way that all the protection functions general pickup and trip signals are combined with this function (available as output signals OUT_PICKUP and OUT_TRIP).
  • Page 86: Parameter Setting Groups

    IRIG-B sync source is selected and the IRIG-B signal source is connected. ABB has tested the IRIG-B with the following clock masters. • Tekron TTM01 GPS clock with IRIG-B output •...
  • Page 87: Functionality

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.6.2 Functionality The protection relay supports six setting groups. Each setting group contains parameters categorized as group settings inside application functions. The customer can change the active setting group at run time. The active setting group can be changed by a parameter or via binary inputs depending on the mode selected with the Configuration/Setting Group/SG operation mode setting.
  • Page 88: Fault Records

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Table 38: SG operation mode = “Logic mode 2” Input BI_SG_2 BI_SG_3 BI_SG_4 BI_SG_5 BI_SG_6 Active group FALSE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE FALSE TRUE FALSE FALSE TRUE TRUE FALSE TRUE TRUE The setting group 1 can be copied to any other or all groups from HMI (Copy group 1). Fault records The protection relay has the capacity to store the records of 128 latest fault events.
  • Page 89 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions beginning of the fault if only a pickup event occurs during the fault. The maximum current value collects the maximum fault currents during the fault. In case frequency cannot be measured, nominal frequency is used for frequency and zero for Frequency gradient and validity is set accordingly.
  • Page 90 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Max diff current IA FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 Maximum phase A differential current Max diff current IB FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 Maximum phase B differential current Max diff current IC FLOAT32 0.000...80.000 Maximum phase C differential current Diff current IA...
  • Page 91 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Current I2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Negative sequence current Max current IA2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Maximum phase A current (b) Max current IB2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Maximum phase B current (b) Max current IC2 FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Maximum phase C...
  • Page 92 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Current Ng-SeqC FLOAT32 0.000...50.000 Negative sequence current Voltage VA FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 Phase A voltage Voltage VB FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 Phase B voltage Voltage VC FLOAT32 0.000...4.000 Phase C voltage Voltage VAB FLOAT32 0.000...4.000...
  • Page 93: Non-Volatile Memory

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PDNSPTOC1 rat. FLOAT32 0.00...999.99 PDNSPTOC1 ratio I2/I1 I2/I1 ratio I2/I1 Frequency FLOAT32 30.00...80.00 Frequency Frequency FLOAT32 -10.00...10.00 Hz/s Frequency gradient gradient Conductance Yo FLOAT32 -1000.00...1000.0 Conductance Yo Susceptance Yo FLOAT32 -1000.00...1000.0 Susceptance Yo...
  • Page 94: Binary Input

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions • Trip circuit lockout • Counter values • Load profile Binary input 3.9.1 Binary input filter time The filter time eliminates debounces and short disturbances on a binary input. The filter time is set for each binary input of the protection relay. GUID-13DA5833-D263-4E23-B666-CF38B1011A4B V1 EN Figure 21: Binary input filtering...
  • Page 95: Binary Input Inversion

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Each binary input has a filter time parameter "Input # filter", where # is the number of the binary input of the module in question (for example "Input 1 filter"). Table 41: Input filter parameter values Parameter Values Default...
  • Page 96: Binary Outputs

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.10 Binary outputs The protection relay provides a number of binary outputs used for tripping, executing local or remote control actions of a breaker or a disconnector, and for connecting the protection relay to external annunciation equipment for indicating, signalling and recording.
  • Page 97: Double-Pole Power Outputs Po3 And Po4 With Trip Circuit Supervision

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions X100 GUID-4E1E21B1-BEEC-4351-A7BE-9D2DBA451985 V1 EN Figure 22: Dual single-pole power output contacts PO1 and PO2 3.10.1.2 Double-pole power outputs PO3 and PO4 with trip circuit supervision The power outputs PO3 and PO4 are double-pole normally open/form A power outputs with trip circuit supervision.
  • Page 98: Dual Single-Pole Signal/Trip Output Contact So3/To1

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions X100 TCM-1 TCM-2 GUID-99C2B8B7-C74C-41CB-90A3-72C9D2DA65B6 V1 EN Figure 23: Double-pole power outputs PO3 and PO4 with trip circuit supervision Power outputs PO3 and PO4 are included in the power supply module located in slot X100 of the protection relay.
  • Page 99: Dual Single-Pole High-Speed Power Outputs Hso1, Hso2 And Hso3

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions X130 SO3/ TCS1 GUID-45757AEE-759A-49AD-AA92-6E54CDEE6CB8 V1 EN Figure 24: Signal/trip output contact SO3/TO1 The signal/trip output contact is included in the module RTD0002 located in slot X130 of the protection relay. 3.10.1.4 Dual single-pole high-speed power outputs HSO1, HSO2 and HSO3 HSO1, HSO2 and HSO3 are dual parallel connected, single-pole, normally open/form A high-speed power outputs.
  • Page 100: Signal Output Contacts

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions X105 HSO1 HSO2 HSO3 GUID-D63F0E1F-73CD-4CD2-AAD1-6E2510F0A308 V1 EN Figure 25: High-speed power outputs HSO1, HSO2 and HSO3 The reset time of the high-speed output contacts is longer than that of the conventional output contacts. High-speed power contacts are part of the card BIO0007 with eight binary inputs and three HSOs.
  • Page 101: Internal Fault Signal Output Irf

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.10.2.1 Internal fault signal output IRF The internal fault signal output (change-over/form C) IRF is a single contact included in the power supply module of the protection relay. X100 GUID-C09595E9-3C42-437A-BDB2-B20C35FA0BD2 V1 EN Figure 26: Internal fault signal output IRF 3.10.2.2 Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in power supply module...
  • Page 102: Signal Outputs So1 And So2 In Rtd Module

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.10.2.3 Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 in RTD module The signal ouputs SO1 and SO2 (single contact/change-over /form C) are included in the RTD0002 module. X130 GUID-DA6EDCF6-596D-4175-A1B6-E1C69C8A2864 V1 EN Figure 28: Signal output in RTD module 3.10.2.4 Signal outputs SO1, SO2 and SO3 in BIO0006 BIO0006 module is provided with signal outputs SO1, SO2 (dual parallel/form C) and...
  • Page 103: Signal Outputs So1, So2, So3 And So4 In Bio0005

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions X130 X130 GUID-E20798C4-49D1-4F3F-8A6E-C366359AE7AF V1 EN Figure 29: Signal outputs in BIO0006 3.10.2.5 Signal outputs SO1, SO2, SO3 and SO4 in BIO0005 The optional card BIO0005 provides the signal outputs SO1, SO2 SO3 and SO4. Signal outputs SO1 and SO2 are dual, parallel form C contacts;...
  • Page 104: Rtd/Ma Inputs

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions X110 X110 GUID-CBA9A48A-2549-455B-907D-8261E2259BF4 V1 EN Figure 30: BIO0005 mounted in slot X110 3.11 RTD/mA inputs 3.11.1 Functionality The RTD and mA analog input module is used for monitoring and metering current (mA), temperature (°C) and resistance (Ω). Each input can be linearly scaled for various applications, for example, transformer’s tap changer position indication.
  • Page 105: Operation Principle

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.11.2 Operation principle All the inputs of the module are independent RTD and mA channels with individual protection, reference and optical isolation for each input, making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module. However, the RTD inputs share a common ground.
  • Page 106: Input Linear Scaling

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions possible, but the default range (0…20 mA) can be set smaller with the Value maximum and Value minimum settings. When the channel is used for resistance type signals and the application requires a linear scaling of the input range, the Value unit setting value has to be "Dimensionless”, where the input range can be linearly scaled with the setting Input minimum and Input maximum to Value minimum and Value maximum.
  • Page 107: Measurement Chain Supervision

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.11.2.4 Measurement chain supervision Each input contains a functionality to monitor the input measurement chain. The circuitry monitors the RTD channels continuously and reports a circuitry break of any enabled input channel. If the measured input value is outside the limits, minimum/maximum value is shown in the corresponding output.
  • Page 108 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions The range information changes and the new values are reported. Out of Range Value maximum AI_RANGE#=3 Val high high limit Hysteresis AI_RANGE#=1 Val high limit AI_RANGE#=0 AI_RANGE#=0 Val low limit AI_RANGE#=2 Val low low limit AI_RANGE#=4 Value Reported Value minimum...
  • Page 109: Deadband Supervision

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.11.2.8 Deadband supervision Each input has an independent deadband supervision. The deadband supervision function reports the measured value according to integrated changes over a time period. GUID-63CA9A0F-24D8-4BA8-A667-88632DF53284 V1 EN Figure 33: Integral deadband supervision The deadband value used in the integral calculation is configured with the Value deadband setting.
  • Page 110: Rtd Temperature Vs. Resistance

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Table 47: Settings for RTD analog deadband supervision Function Setting Maximum/minimum (=range) RTD analog input Value deadband Value maximum / Value minimum (=20000) Since the function can be utilized in various measurement modes, the default values are set to the extremes;...
  • Page 111: Rtd/Ma Input Connection

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.11.2.10 RTD/mA input connection RTD inputs can be used with a 2-wire or 3-wire connection with common ground. When using the 3-wire connection, it is important that all three wires connecting the sensor are symmetrical, that is, the wires are of the same type and length.
  • Page 112 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions X110 Resistor sensor RTD1 RTD2 RTD3 GUID-CEF1FA63-A641-4F5E-89A3-E1529307D198 V2 EN Figure 34: Three RTD sensors and two resistance sensors connected according to the 3-wire connection for 6RTD/2mA card 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 113 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions X110 Resistor sensor RTD1 RTD2 RTD3 GUID-8DAE1E59-160B-4E90-ABB3-952C84E129D2 V2 EN Figure 35: Three RTD sensors and two resistance sensors connected according to the 2-wire connection for 6RTD/2mA card X110 Sensor Shunt Transducer (44 Ω) GUID-FC23D8FC-E9BF-4B62-B8AA-52B4EDE2FF12 V2 EN Figure 36: mA wiring connection for 6RTD/2mA card 2RTD/1mA card...
  • Page 114 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 2RTD/1mA/3SO card has one milliampere input, two inputs from RTD sensors and three signal outputs. The Input 1 is assigned for current measurements, inputs 2 and 3 are for RTD sensors and outputs 4,5,6 are used signal outputs. RTD/mA input connections The examples of 3-wire and 2-wire connections of resistance and temperature sensors to the 2RTD/1mA board are as shown:...
  • Page 115: Signals

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions X130 Resistor sensor RTD1 RTD2 GUID-F939E7EE-B932-4002-9D27-1CEA7C595E0B V2 EN Figure 38: Two RTD and resistance sensors connected according to the 2-wire connection for RTD/mA card X130 Sensor Shunt Transducer (44 Ω) GUID-FBB50B49-0EFE-4D1C-AB71-204C3E170C1D V2 EN Figure 39: mA wiring connection for RTD/mA card 3.11.3 Signals...
  • Page 116: Settings

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Name Type Description AI_VAL3 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 9-10-15c, instantaneous value AI_VAL4 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 11-12-15c, instantaneous value AI_VAL5 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 13-14-15c, instantaneous value AI_VAL6 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 17-18-16c, instantaneous value AI_VAL7 FLOAT32 RTD input, Connectors 19-20-16c, instantaneous value...
  • Page 117: Monitored Data

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Table 51: mA input settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Input mode 1=Not in use 1=Not in use Analogue input mode 5=0..20mA Input maximum 0...20 Maximum analogue input value for mA or resistance scaling Input minimum 0...20...
  • Page 118: Goose Function Blocks

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description AI_RANGE3 Enum 0=normal RTD input, Connectors 1=high 9-10-15c, range 2=low 3=high-high 4=low-low AI_DB4 FLOAT32 -10000.0...10000 RTD input, Connectors 7-8-11c, reported value AI_RANGE4 Enum 0=normal RTD input, Connectors 1=high 7-8-11c, range 2=low 3=high-high...
  • Page 119: Goosercv_Bin Function Block

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Common signals The VALID output indicates the validity of received GOOSE data, which means in case of valid, that the GOOSE communication is working and received data quality bits (if configured) indicate good process data. Invalid status is caused either by bad data quality bits or GOOSE communication failure.
  • Page 120: Goosercv_Dp Function Block

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.12.2 GOOSERCV_DP function block 3.12.2.1 Function block GUID-63C0C3EE-1C0E-4F78-A06E-3E84F457FC98 V1 EN Figure 41: Function block 3.12.2.2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_DP function is used to connect the GOOSE double binary inputs to the application. 3.12.2.3 Signals Table 55: GOOSERCV_DP Input signals Name Type...
  • Page 121: Functionality

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.12.3.2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_MV function is used to connect the GOOSE measured value inputs to the application. 3.12.3.3 Signals Table 57: GOOSERCV_MV Input signals Name Type Default Description FLOAT32 Input signal Table 58: GOOSERCV_MV Output signals Name Type Description...
  • Page 122: Goosercv_Intl Function Block

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Table 60: GOOSERCV_INT8 Output signals Name Type Description INT8 Output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3.12.5 GOOSERCV_INTL function block 3.12.5.1 Function block GUID-241A36E0-1BB9-4323-989F-39668A7B1DAC V1 EN Figure 44: Function block 3.12.5.2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_INTL function is used to connect the GOOSE double binary input to the application and extracting single binary position signals from the double binary position signal.
  • Page 123: Goosercv_Cmv Function Block

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Table 62: GOOSERCV_INTL Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Position open output signal BOOLEAN Position closed output signal BOOLEAN Position OK output signal VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3.12.6 GOOSERCV_CMV function block 3.12.6.1 Function block GUID-4C3F3A1A-F5D1-42E1-840F-6106C58CB380 V1 EN Figure 45: Function block...
  • Page 124: Goosercv_Enum Function Block

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Table 64: GOOSERCV_CMV Output signals Name Type Description FLOAT32 Output signal (amplitude) FLOAT32 Output signal (angle) VALID BOOLEAN Output signal 3.12.7 GOOSERCV_ENUM function block 3.12.7.1 Function block GUID-E1AE8AD3-ED99-448A-8C11-558BCA68CDC4 V1 EN Figure 46: Function block 3.12.7.2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_ENUM function block is used to connect GOOSE enumerator inputs...
  • Page 125: Goosercv_Int32 Function Block

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.12.8 GOOSERCV_INT32 function block 3.12.8.1 Function block GUID-61FF1ECC-507D-4B6D-8CA5-713A59F58D5C V1 EN Figure 47: Function block 3.12.8.2 Functionality The GOOSERCV_INT32 function block is used to connect GOOSE 32 bit integer inputs to the application. 3.12.8.3 Signals Table 67: GOOSERCV_INT32 Input signals Name...
  • Page 126: Signals

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions logic quality bit propagation, each (simple and even combined) signal has quality which can be evaluated. The OUT output indicates quality good of the input signal. Input signals that have no quality bits set or only test bit is set, will indicate quality good status. 3.13.1.2 Signals Table 69:...
  • Page 127: Qty_Goose_Comm Function Block

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.13.3 QTY_GOOSE_COMM function block 3.13.3.1 Functionality The QTY_GOOSE_COMM function block evaluates the peer device communication status from the quality bits of the input signal and passes it as a Boolean signal to the application. The IN input signal must be connected to the VALID signal of the GOOSE function block.
  • Page 128: Signals

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.13.4.2 Signals Table 75: T_HEALTH Input signals Name Type Default Description Input signal Table 76: T_HEALTH Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output signal WARNING BOOLEAN Output signal ALARM BOOLEAN Output signal 3.13.5 T_F32_INT8 function block 3.13.5.1 Functionality T_F32_INT8 is a type conversion function.
  • Page 129: Configurable Logic Blocks

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.14 Configurable logic blocks 3.14.1 Standard configurable logic blocks 3.14.1.1 OR function block Functionality OR and OR6 are used to form general combinatory expressions with Boolean variables. The O output is activated when at least one input has the value TRUE. The default value of all inputs is FALSE, which makes it possible to use only the required number of inputs and leave the rest disconnected.
  • Page 130: Xor Function Block

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Function block GUID-7592F296-60B5-4414-8E17-2F641316CA43 V1 EN Figure 50: Function blocks Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600). 3.14.1.3 XOR function block Functionality The exclusive OR function XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions with Boolean variables.
  • Page 131: Max3 Function Block

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Function block GUID-0D0FC187-4224-433C-9664-908168EE3626 V1 EN Figure 52: Function block Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600). 3.14.1.5 MAX3 function block Functionality The maximum function MAX3 selects the maximum value from three analog values. The disconnected inputs have the value 0.
  • Page 132: R_Trig Function Block

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Function block GUID-40218B77-8A30-445A-977E-46CB8783490D V1 EN Figure 54: Function block Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600). 3.14.1.7 R_TRIG function block Functionality R_Trig is used as a rising edge detector. R_Trig detects the transition from FALSE to TRUE at the CLK input.
  • Page 133: T_Pos_Xx Function Blocks

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Function block GUID-B47152D2-3855-4306-8F2E-73D8FDEC4C1D V1 EN Figure 56: Function block Settings The function does not have any parameters available in LHMI or Protection and Control IED Manager (PCM600). 3.14.1.9 T_POS_XX function blocks Functionality The circuit breaker position information can be communicated with the IEC 61850 GOOSE messages.
  • Page 134: Local/Remote Control Function Block Control

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.14.2 Local/remote control function block CONTROL 3.14.2.1 Function block GUID-FA386432-3AEF-468D-B25E-D1C5BDA838E3 V2 EN Figure 58: Function block 3.14.2.2 Functionality Local/Remote control is by default realized through the R/L button on the front panel. The control via binary input can be enabled by setting the value of the LR control setting to "Binary input".
  • Page 135: Signals

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.14.2.3 Signals Table 79: CONTROL input signals Name Type Default Description CTRL_OFF BOOLEAN Control input OFF CTRL_LOC BOOLEAN Control input Local CTRL_STA BOOLEAN Control input Station CTRL_REM BOOLEAN Control input Remote Table 80: CONTROL output signals Name Type Description...
  • Page 136: Factory Settings Restoration

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Table 82: Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Command response Enum 0=No commands Latest command response 1=Select open 2=Select close 3=Trip open 4=Trip close 5=Direct open 6=Direct close 7=Cancel 8=Position reached 9=Position timeout 10=Object status only...
  • Page 137: Load Profile Record Loadprof

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions state. All default settings and configuration files stored in the factory are restored. For further information on restoring factory settings, see the operation manual. 3.16 Load profile record LoadProf 3.16.1 Functionality The protection relay is provided with a load profile recorder. The load profile feature stores the historical load data captured at a periodical time interval (demand interval).
  • Page 138 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Disabled Quantity not selected VAB2 Phase-to-phase AB voltage, instance 2 VBC2 Phase-to-phase BC voltage, instance 2 VCA2 Phase-to-phase CA voltage, instance 2 Phase-to-ground A voltage, instance 2 Phase-to-ground B voltage, instance 2 Phase-to-ground C voltage, instance 2 Apparent power, instance 1 Real power, instance 1 Reactive power, instance 1...
  • Page 139: Length Of Record

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Disabled Quantity not selected PFA2 Phase A power factor, instance 2 PFB2 Phase B power factor, instance 2 PFC2 Phase C power factor, instance 2 If the data source for the selected quantity is removed, for example, with Application Configuration in PCM600, the load profile recorder stops recording it and the previously collected data are cleared.
  • Page 140: Uploading Of Record

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.16.1.3 Uploading of record The protection relay stores the load profile COMTRADE files to the C:\LDP \COMTRADE folder. The files can be uploaded with the PCM600 tool or any appropriate computer software that can access the C:\LDP\COMTRADE folder. The load profile record consists of two COMTRADE file types: the configuration file (.CFG) and the data file (.DAT).
  • Page 141: Clearing Of Record

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.16.1.4 Clearing of record The load profile record can be cleared with Reset load profile rec via HMI, communication or the ACT input in PCM600. Clearing of the record is allowed only on the engineer and administrator authorization levels. The load profile record is automatically cleared if the quantity selection parameters are changed or any other parameter which affects the content of the COMTRADE configuration file is changed.
  • Page 142: Settings

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions 3.16.4 Settings 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 143 Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Table 86: LoadProf Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Quantity Sel 1 0=Disabled 0=Disabled Select quantity to be recorded 1=IA 2=IB 3=IC 4=IG 5=IA2 6=IB2...
  • Page 144: Monitored Data

    Section 3 1MAC504801-IB E Basic functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Mem. alarm level 0...100 Set memory alarm level 3.16.5 Monitored data Table 87: LoadProf Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Rec. memory used INT32 0...100 How much recording memory is currently used 620 series ANSI...
  • Page 145: Section 4 Protection Functions

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Section 4 Protection functions Current protection 4.1.1 Three-phase non-directional overcurrent protection 51P/50P 4.1.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase non-directional PHLPTOC 3I> overcurrent protection, low stage Three-phase non-directional PHHPTOC 3I>>...
  • Page 146: Operation Principle

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions In the DT mode, the function trips after a predefined trip time and resets when the fault current disappears. The IDMT mode provides current-dependent timer characteristics. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timers or the function itself, if desired.
  • Page 147 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-640654EC-1E77-4ED5-BE41-9EC399B686BA-ANSI V1 EN Figure 62: Pickup value behavior with ENA_MULT input activated Phase selection logic If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds the setting. If the phase information matches the Num of pickup phases setting, the phase selection logic activates the timer module.
  • Page 148 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Reset delay time value is exceeded. When the IDMT curves are selected, the Type of reset curve setting can be set to "Immediate", "Def time reset" or "Inverse reset". The reset curve type "Immediate" causes an immediate reset. With the reset curve type "Def time reset", the reset time depends on the Reset delay time setting.
  • Page 149: Measurement Modes

    IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable. The DT characteristics can be chosen by selecting the Operating curve type values "ANSI Def.
  • Page 150 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Operating curve type 50P-1/2 (6) Long Time Extremely Inverse (7) Long Time Very Inverse (8) Long Time Inverse (9) IEC Normal Inverse (10) IEC Very Inverse (11) IEC Inverse (12) IEC Extremely Inverse (13) IEC Short Time Inverse (14) IEC Long Time Inverse (15) IEC Definite Time (17) User programmable...
  • Page 151: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.1.7 Application 51P/50P is used in several applications in the power system. The applications include but are not limited to: • Selective overcurrent and short-circuit protection of feeders in distribution and subtransmission systems • Backup overcurrent and short-circuit protection of power transformers and generators •...
  • Page 152 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Transformer overcurrent protection The purpose of transformer overcurrent protection is to operate as main protection, when differential protection is not used. It can also be used as coarse back-up protection for differential protection in faults inside the zone of protection, that is, faults occurring in incoming or outgoing feeders, in the region of transformer terminals and tank cover.
  • Page 153 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions A070978-ANSI V2 EN Figure 63: Example of traditional time selective transformer overcurrent protection The operating times of the main and backup overcurrent protection of the above scheme become quite long, this applies especially in the busbar faults and also in the transformer LV-terminal faults.
  • Page 154 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions LV terminals and short lines. The functionality and performance of the proposed overcurrent protections can be summarized as seen in the table. Table 91: Proposed functionality of numerical transformer and busbar overcurrent protection. DT = definite time, IDMT = inverse definite minimum time O/C-stage Operating char.
  • Page 155 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions A070980-ANSI V1 EN Figure 64: Numerical overcurrent protection functionality for a typical sub- transmission/distribution substation (feeder protection not shown).Blocking output = digital output signal from the pickup of a protection stage, Blocking in = digital input signal to block the operation of a protection stage The operating times of the time selective stages are very short, because the grading margins between successive protection stages can be kept short.
  • Page 156 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Radial outgoing feeder overcurrent protection The basic requirements for feeder overcurrent protection are adequate sensitivity and operation speed taking into account the minimum and maximum fault current levels along the protected line, selectivity requirements, inrush currents and the thermal and mechanical withstand of the lines to be protected.
  • Page 157 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions A070982-ANSI V1 EN Figure 65: Functionality of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection The coordination plan is an effective tool to study the operation of time selective operation characteristics. All the points mentioned earlier, required to define the overcurrent protection parameters, can be expressed simultaneously in a coordination plan.
  • Page 158: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions A070984 V2 EN Figure 66: Example coordination of numerical multiple-stage overcurrent protection 4.1.1.8 Signals Table 92: 51P Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False...
  • Page 159: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 94: 50P-3 Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier Table 95: 51P Output signals...
  • Page 160 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Trip delay time 40...200000 Trip delay time Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext Inv 5=ANSI DT Selection of time delay curve type 2=ANSI Very Inv 3=ANSI Norm Inv 4=ANSI Mod Inv 5=ANSI DT 6=LT Ext Inv...
  • Page 161 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 100: 50P-1/2 Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 0.10...40.00 0.01 Pickup value Pickup value mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scaling the pickup value Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves Trip delay time 40...200000 Trip delay time...
  • Page 162: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 102: 50P-3 Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 1.00...40.00 0.01 Pickup value Pickup value mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scaling the pickup value Trip delay time 20...200000 Trip delay time Table 103: 50P-3 Non group settings Parameter...
  • Page 163: Technical Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 106: 50P-3 Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of pickup time / trip time 50P-3 Enum 1=Enabled Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=Disabled 4.1.1.11 Technical data Table 107: 51P/50P Technical data Characteristic Value...
  • Page 164: Three-Phase Non-Directional Long Time Overcurrent Protection 51Lt158

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.2 Three-phase non-directional long time overcurrent protection 51LT 4.1.2.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase non-directional long time PHLTPTOC 3I> 51LT overcurrent protection 4.1.2.2 Function block GUID-64BF56CE-B585-46A5-AD6D-5DE762D107A9 V1 EN Figure 67: Function block...
  • Page 165 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions A070552-ANSI V1 EN Figure 68: Functional module diagram. I_A, I_B and I_C represent phase currents. Level detector The measured phase currents are compared phasewise to the set Pickup value. If the measured value exceeds the set Pickup value, the level detector reports the exceeding of the value to the phase selection logic.
  • Page 166: Timer Characteristics

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Phase selection logic If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the measured current exceeds the setting. If the phase information matches the Num of pickup phases setting, the phase selection logic activates the timer module.
  • Page 167: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Operating curve type 51LT (4) Long Time Moderately Inverse (5) Long Definite Time (6) Very Long Time Extremely Inverse (7) Very Long Time Very Inverse (8) Very Long Time Inverse (9) Long Time Normal Inverse (14) IEC Long Time Inverse (17) Programmable For a detailed description of timers, refer to section...
  • Page 168: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 111: 51LT Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup 4.1.2.8 Settings Table 112: 51LT Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 0.05...5.00 0.01 Pickup value Pickup value mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scaling the pickup value...
  • Page 169: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable curve Curve parameter D 0.46...30.00 29.10 Parameter D for customer programmable curve Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable curve 4.1.2.9 Monitored data...
  • Page 170: Three-Phase Directional Overcurrent Protection 67/51P And 67/50P164

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.3 Three-phase directional overcurrent protection 67/51P and 67/50P 4.1.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase directional overcurrent DPHLPDOC 3I> -> 67/51P protection, low stage Three-phase directional overcurrent DPHHPDOC 3I>>...
  • Page 171 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The operation of directional overcurrent protection can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. V_A_AB V_B_BC V_C_CA Phase Directional selection calculation logic Timer TRIP NON_DIR Level...
  • Page 172 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Allow Non Dir to "True", the non-directional operation is allowed when the directional information is invalid. The Characteristic angle setting is used to turn the directional characteristic. The value of Characteristic angle should be chosen in such a way that all the faults in the operating direction are seen in the operating zone and all the faults in the opposite direction are seen in the non-operating zone.
  • Page 173 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions time or if the fault current disappears while the fictive voltage is in use. When the voltage is below Min trip voltage and hysteresis and the fictive voltage is unusable, the fault direction cannot be determined. The fictive voltage can be unusable for two reasons: •...
  • Page 174 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions the value to the phase selection logic. If the ENA_MULT input is active, the Pickup value setting is multiplied by the Pickup value Mult setting. Do not set the multiplier setting Pickup value Mult higher than necessary. If the value is too high, the function may not trip at all during an inrush followed by a fault, no matter how severe the fault is.
  • Page 175 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions the operation timer has reached the value of Trip delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the TRIP output is activated. When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E.
  • Page 176: Measurement Modes

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the trip timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the TRIP output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset.
  • Page 177 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-18902907-5666-4AB6-80FD-BE875DFCBBD6-ANSI V1 EN Figure 74: Configurable operating sectors Table 118: Momentary per phase direction value for monitored data view Criterion for per phase direction information The value for DIR_A/_B/_C The ANGLE_X is not in any of the defined sectors, or 0 = unknown the direction cannot be defined due too low amplitude...
  • Page 178 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 119: Momentary phase combined direction value for monitored data view Criterion for phase combined direction information The value for DIRECTION The direction information (DIR_X) for all phases is 0 = unknown unknown The direction information (DIR_X) for at least one 1 = forward phase is forward, none being in reverse The direction information (DIR_X) for at least one...
  • Page 179 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-FF99F2A3-811A-4DAD-85E0-23AEC4C57183-ANSI V1 EN Figure 75: Single-phase ground fault, phase A In an example case of a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is between phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity V operating quantity I in the self-polarizing method.
  • Page 180 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Cross-polarizing as polarizing quantity Table 121: Equations for calculating angle difference for cross-polarizing method Faulted Used Used Angle difference phases fault polarizing current voltage ANGLE A ϕ ϕ ϕ GUID-330CBC28-7CE9-431A-9EC2-8590092DDAFF-ANSI V1 EN ANGLE B ϕ...
  • Page 181 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions In an example of the phasors in a two-phase short-circuit failure where the fault is between the phases B and C, the angle difference is measured between the polarizing quantity V and operating quantity I marked as φ.
  • Page 182 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Negative sequence voltage as polarizing quantity When the negative voltage is used as the polarizing quantity, the angle difference between the operating and polarizing quantity is calculated with the same formula for all fault types: ANGLE X −...
  • Page 183 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Faulted Used fault Used Angle difference phases current polarizing voltage A - B ANGLE A − − − ϕ ϕ ϕ GUID-D510F5F5-D43B-4D35-8963-CDFA325D8036-ANSI V1 EN B - C − − − − ANGLE B ϕ ϕ...
  • Page 184: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The network rotating direction is set in the protection relay using the parameter in the HMI menu Configuration/System/Phase rotation. The default parameter value is "ABC". NETWORK ROTATION ABC NETWORK ROTATION ACB GUID-BF32C1D4-ECB5-4E96-A27A-05C637D32C86-ANSI V1 EN Figure 81: Examples of network rotating direction 4.1.3.7...
  • Page 185 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions relays are also used to have a selective protection scheme, for example in case of parallel distribution lines or power transformers fed by the same single source.In ring connected supply feeders between substations or feeders with two feeding sources, 67/51P and 67/50P is also used.
  • Page 186 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-1845C47B-BA8C-4F85-9E7D-DC6872D3AB8B-ANSI V1 EN Figure 83: Overcurrent protection of parallel operating transformers Closed ring network topology The closed ring network topology is used in applications where electricity distribution for the consumers is secured during network fault situations. The power is fed at least from two directions which means that the current direction can be varied.
  • Page 187: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-FA46F951-B376-4BC7-BCF4-F970C876CA7A-ANSI V1 EN Figure 84: Closed ring network topology where feeding lines are protected with directional overcurrent protection relays 4.1.3.8 Signals Table 123: 67/51P Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL...
  • Page 188: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 124: 67/50P Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current SIGNAL Negative phase sequence current V_A_AB SIGNAL Phase to ground voltage A or phase to phase voltage AB V_B_BC SIGNAL Phase to ground voltage B or phase to phase voltage BC...
  • Page 189 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext Inv 5=ANSI DT Selection of time delay curve type 2=ANSI Very Inv 3=ANSI Norm Inv 4=ANSI Mod Inv 5=ANSI DT 6=LT Ext Inv 7=LT Very Inv 8=LT Inv 9=IEC Norm Inv...
  • Page 190 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter A 0.0086...120.0000 28.2000 Parameter A for customer programmable curve Curve parameter B 0.0000...0.7120 0.1217 Parameter B for customer programmable curve Curve parameter C 0.02...2.00 2.00 Parameter C for customer programmable curve Curve parameter D...
  • Page 191 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Min reverse angle 0...90 Minimum phase angle in reverse direction Voltage Mem time 0...3000 Voltage memory time Pol quantity -2=Pos. seq. volt. 5=Cross pol Reference quantity used to determine fault 1=Self pol direction 4=Neg.
  • Page 192: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.3.10 Monitored data Table 131: 67/51P Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of pickup time / trip time FAULT_DIR Enum 0=unknown Detected fault direction 1=forward 2=backward 3=both DIRECTION Enum 0=unknown Direction information...
  • Page 193: Technical Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description DIR_A Enum 0=unknown Direction phase A 1=forward 2=backward 3=both DIR_B Enum 0=unknown Direction phase B 1=forward 2=backward 3=both DIR_C Enum 0=unknown Direction phase C 1=forward 2=backward 3=both ANGLE_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Calculated angle difference,...
  • Page 194: Non-Directional Neutral Overcurrent Protection 51N/50N And Non-Directional Ground Fault Protection 51G/50G

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Characteristic Value Reset ratio Typically 0.96 Retardation time <35 ms Trip time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Trip time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics DFT: -50 dB at f = n ×...
  • Page 195: Operation Principle

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The function picks up and trips when the measured (IG) or calculated (IN) ground current exceeds the set limit. The trip time characteristic for low stage 51N/G and high stage 50N/ G-1/2 can be selected to be either definite time (DT) or inverse definite minimum time (IDMT).
  • Page 196 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Timer Once activated, the timer activates the PICKUP output. Depending on the value of the Operating curve type setting, the time characteristics are according to DT or IDMT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Trip delay time in the DT mode or the maximum value defined by the inverse time curve, the TRIP output is activated.
  • Page 197: Measurement Modes

    IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable. The user can choose the DT characteristic by selecting the Operating curve type values "ANSI...
  • Page 198 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 135: Timer characteristics supported by different stages Operating curve type 51N/G 50N/G-1/2 (1) ANSI Extremely Inverse (2) ANSI Very Inverse (3) ANSI Normal Inverse (4) ANSI Moderately Inverse (5) ANSI Definite Time (6) Long Time Extremely Inverse (7) Long Time Very Inverse (8) Long Time Inverse (9) IEC Normal Inverse...
  • Page 199: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The Type of reset curve setting does not apply to 50N/G-3 or when the DT operation is selected. The reset is purely defined by the Reset delay time setting. 4.1.4.7 Application 51N/50N or 51G/50G is designed for protection and clearance of ground faults in distribution and sub-transmission networks where the neutral point is isolated or grounded via a resonance coil or through low resistance.
  • Page 200: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 139: 50N/G-3 Input signals Name Type Default Description IG or IN SIGNAL Ground current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ENA_MULT BOOLEAN 0=False Enable signal for current multiplier Table 140: 51N/G Output signals Name Type...
  • Page 201 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Trip delay time 40...200000 Trip delay time Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext Inv 5=ANSI DT Selection of time delay curve type 2=ANSI Very Inv 3=ANSI Norm Inv 4=ANSI Mod Inv 5=ANSI DT 6=LT Ext Inv...
  • Page 202 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 145: 50N/G-1/2 Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 0.10...40.00 0.01 Pickup value Pickup value mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scaling the pickup value Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves Trip delay time 40...200000 1000...
  • Page 203: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 147: 50N/G-3 Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 1.00...40.00 0.01 1.00 Pickup value Pickup value mult 0.8...10.0 Multiplier for scaling the pickup value Trip delay time 20...200000 Trip delay time Table 148: 50N/G-3 Non group settings Parameter...
  • Page 204: Technical Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.4.11 Technical data Table 152: 51N/G, 50N/G-1/2 & 50N/G-3 Technical data Characteristic Value 51N/G ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I 50N-1/2 & 50G-1/2 ±1.5% of set value or ±0.002 × I (at currents in the range of 0.1…10 ×...
  • Page 205: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.5.2 Function block 67/50N-2 67/51N 67/50N-1 TRIP I0/IG/I2 TRIP TRIP I0/IG/I2 I0/IG/I2 PICKUP V0/VG/V2 PICKUP V0/VG/V2 PICKUP V0/VG/V2 BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK ENA_MULT ENA_MULT ENA_MULT RCA_CTL RCA_CTL RCA_CTL A070433-ANSI V1 EN Figure 87: Function block 4.1.5.3 Functionality The earth-fault function 67/51N and 67/50N is used as directional earth-fault protection.
  • Page 206 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions A070438-ANSI V1 EN Figure 88: Functional module diagram. I and V represent the zero sequence current and zero sequence voltage. Level detector The measured ground current is compared to the set Pickup value. The zero sequence voltage (-Vo) also needs to be compared to the set Voltage pickup value.
  • Page 207 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions For defining the operation sector, there are five modes available through the Operation mode setting. Table 153: Operation modes Operation mode Description Phase angle The operating sectors for forward and reverse are Min forward angle , Max defined with the settings forward angle , Min reverse angle and Max reverse angle .
  • Page 208 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The Correction angle setting can be used to improve selectivity due the inaccuracies in the measurement transformers. The setting decreases the operation sector. The correction can only be used with the "IoCos" or "IoSin" modes. When polarizing quantity (zero sequence voltage (-U )) is inverted because of switched voltage measurement cables, the correction can be done by setting the Pol reversal to...
  • Page 209 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions When the user-programmable IDMT curve is selected, the operation time characteristics are defined by the parameters Curve parameter A, Curve parameter B, Curve parameter C, Curve parameter D and Curve parameter E. If a drop-off situation happens, that is, a fault suddenly disappears before the trip delay is exceeded, the timer reset state is activated.
  • Page 210: Directional Ground-Fault Principles

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the trip timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the TRIP output is not deactivated when blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset.
  • Page 211 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions maximum torque line Characteristic angle = 0 deg -V (polarizing quantity) (operating quantity) Min forward angle Max forward angle Non-operating area zero torque line Max reverse angle Min reverse angle Min operate current GUID-829C6CEB-19F0-4730-AC98-C5528C35A297-ANSI V1 EN Figure 89: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=0 degrees in a compensated network...
  • Page 212 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions (polarizing quantity) Characteristic angle = +60 deg maximum torque line Min forward angle Min operate current (operating quantity) Max reverse angle Max forward angle Min reverse angle zero torque line GUID-D72D678C-9C87-4830-BB85-FE00F5EA39C2-ANSI V1 EN Figure 90: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=+60 degrees in a solidly grounded network Example 3...
  • Page 213 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions (polarizing quantity) Characteristic angle = -90 deg Max forward angle Min reverse angle maximum torque line (operating quantity) Min forward angle Max reverse angle Min operate current zero torque line GUID-67BE307E-576A-44A9-B615-2A3B184A410D-ANSI V1 EN Figure 91: Definition of the relay characteristic angle, RCA=–90 degrees in an isolated network Directional ground-fault protection in an isolated neutral network...
  • Page 214 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions ΣI ΣI ΣI A070441-ANSI V1 EN Figure 92: Ground-fault situation in an isolated network Directional ground-fault protection in a compensated network In compensated networks, the capacitive fault current and the inductive resonance coil current compensate each other. The protection cannot be based on the reactive current measurement, since the current of the compensation coil would disturb the operation of the protection relays.
  • Page 215 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions accordingly. This is done with an auxiliary input in the protection relay which receives a signal from an auxiliary switch of the disconnector of the Petersen coil in compensated networks or of the grounding resistor in grounded networks. As a result, the characteristic angle is set automatically to suit the grounding method used.
  • Page 216: Measurement Modes

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Negative Positive operation operation zone zone A070443-ANSI V2 EN Figure 94: Extended operation area in directional ground-fault protection 4.1.5.6 Measurement modes The function operates on three alternative measurement modes: "RMS", "DFT" and "Peak-to-Peak". The measurement mode is selected with the Measurement mode setting. Table 157: Measurement modes supported by 67/51N and 67/50N stages Measurement mode...
  • Page 217: Timer Characteristics

    IEEE C37.112 and six with the IEC 60255-3 standard. Two curves follow the special characteristics of ABB praxis and are referred to as RI and RD. In addition to this, a user programmable curve can be used if none of the standard curves are applicable. The user can choose the DT characteristic by selecting the Operating curve type values "ANSI...
  • Page 218: Directional Ground-Fault Characteristics

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 159: Reset time characteristics supported by different stages Reset curve type 67/51N and 67/50N-2 Note 67/50N-1 (1) Immediate Available for all operate time curves (2) Def time reset Available for all operate time curves (3) Inverse reset Available only for ANSI and user programmable curves...
  • Page 219 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions = 0 deg Forward area Min forward angle Max forward angle Non-operating area Max reverse angle Min reverse angle Backward Min operate current area GUID-92004AD5-05AA-4306-9574-9ED8D51524B4-ANSI V1 EN Figure 95: Configurable operating sectors in phase angle characteristic Table 160: Momentary operating direction Fault direction...
  • Page 220 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Directional operation is not allowed (the setting Allow Non Dir is "False") when the measured polarizing or operating quantities are not valid, that is, their magnitude is below the set minimum values. The minimum values can be defined with the settings Min trip current and Min trip voltage.
  • Page 221 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 162: Relay characteristic angle control in the IoSin and IoCos operation criteria Operation mode: RCA_CTL = "False" RCA_CTL = "True" IoSin Actual operation criterion: Iosin(φ) Actual operation criterion: Iocos(φ) IoCos Actual operation criterion: Actual operation criterion: Iosin(φ) Iocos(φ) When the Iosin(φ) or Iocos(φ) criterion is used, the component indicates a forward- or...
  • Page 222 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Correction angle = -90 deg Min operating current GUID-560EFC3C-34BF-4852-BF8C-E3A2A7750275-ANSI V1 EN Figure 96: Operating characteristic I sin(φ) in forward fault The operating sector is limited by angle correction, that is, the operating sector is 180 degrees - 2*(angle correction).
  • Page 223 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Correction angle = -90 deg Min operating current GUID-10A890BE-8C81-45B2-9299-77DD764171E1-ANSI V1 EN Figure 97: Operating characteristic I sin(φ) in reverse fault Example 3. Iocos(φ) criterion selected, forward-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 1 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 224 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions = 0 deg Correction angle Min operating current GUID-11E40C1F-6245-4532-9199-2E2F1D9B45E4-ANSI V1 EN Figure 98: Operating characteristic I cos(φ) in forward fault Example 4. Iocos(φ) criterion selected, reverse-type fault => FAULT_DIR = 2 = 0 deg Min operating current Correction...
  • Page 225 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Phase angle 80 The operation criterion phase angle 80 is selected with the Operation mode setting by using the value "Phase angle 80". Phase angle 80 implements the same functionality as the phase angle but with the following differences: •...
  • Page 226 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Forward area 70 deg 80 deg Min forward angle Non-operating area Max forward angle 80 deg 70 deg Max reverse angle Min reverse angle Backward 3% nominal area amplitude 1% nominal amplitude GUID-EFC9438D-9169-4733-9BE9-6B343F37001A-ANSI V1 EN Figure 100: Operating characteristic for phase angle classic 80 / % of...
  • Page 227 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Phase angle 88 implements the same functionality as the phase angle but with the following differences: • The Max forward angle and Max reverse angle settings cannot be set but they have a fixed value of 88 degrees •...
  • Page 228 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Min forward angle Max forward angle Non-operating area 88 deg 88 deg Max reverse angle Min reverse angle 1% nominal amplitude 20% nominal amplitude 100% nominal amplitude GUID-0F0560B7-943E-4CED-A4B8-A561BAE08956-ANSI V1 EN Figure 102: Operating characteristic for phase angle classic 88 / % of 88 deg 100%...
  • Page 229: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.5.9 Application The directional earth-fault protection 67/51N and 67/50N is designed for protection and clearance of ground faults and for ground-fault protection of different equipment connected to the power systems, such as shunt capacitor banks or shunt reactors, and for backup ground-fault protection of power transformers.
  • Page 230 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions measurement, since the current of the compensation coil would disturb the operation of the relays. In this case, the selectivity is based on the measurement of the active current component. This means that the zero sequence current is mainly resistive and has zero phase shift compared to the zero sequence voltage (-V ) and the characteristic angle is 0 degrees.
  • Page 231: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions A070697-ANSI V1 EN Figure 104: Connection of measuring transformers 4.1.5.10 Signals Table 163: 67/51N and 67/50N-1 Input signals Name Type Default Description I0 or IG or I2 SIGNAL Zero Sequence current / Negative sequence current V0 or VG or V2 SIGNAL Zero Sequence voltage / Negative sequence voltage...
  • Page 232: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 164: 67/50N-2 Input signals Name Type Default Description I0 or IG or I2 SIGNAL Zero Sequence current / Negative sequence current V0 or VG or V2 SIGNAL Zero Sequence voltage / Negative sequence voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False...
  • Page 233 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext Inv 5=ANSI DT Selection of time delay curve type 2=ANSI Very Inv 3=ANSI Norm Inv 4=ANSI Mod Inv 5=ANSI DT 6=LT Ext Inv 7=LT Very Inv 8=LT Inv 9=IEC Norm Inv...
  • Page 234 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode 2=DFT 3=Peak-to-Peak Min trip current 0.005...1.000 0.001 0.005 Minimum trip current Min trip voltage 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.01 Minimum trip voltage Correction angle 0.0...10.0 Angle correction...
  • Page 235 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation mode 1=Phase angle 1=Phase angle Operation criteria 2=IoSin 3=IoCos 4=Phase angle 80 5=Phase angle 88 Characteristic angle -179...180 Characteristic angle Max forward angle 0...180 Maximum phase angle in forward direction Max reverse angle 0...180 Maximum phase angle in reverse direction...
  • Page 236: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve parameter E 0.0...1.0 Parameter E for customer programmable curve IG/I0 signal Sel 1=Measured IG 2=Calculated I0 Selection for used Io signal 2=Calculated I0 Pol signal Sel 1=Measured VG 2=Calculated V0 Selection for used polarization signal...
  • Page 237: Technical Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 172: 67/50N Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description FAULT_DIR Enum 0=unknown Detected fault direction 1=forward 2=backward 3=both PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of pickup time / trip time DIRECTION Enum 0=unknown Direction information 1=forward 2=backward 3=both...
  • Page 238: Sensitive Earth-Fault Protection 50Sef

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Characteristic Value Reset time <40 ms Reset ratio Typically 0.96 Retardation time <30 ms Trip time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms Trip time accuracy in inverse time mode ±5.0% of the theoretical value or ±20 ms Suppression of harmonics RMS: No suppression...
  • Page 239: Operation Principle

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The function also contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs. 4.1.6.4 Operation principle See function 51N. 4.1.6.5 Measurement modes See function 51N. 4.1.6.6 Timer characteristics See function 51N. 4.1.6.7 Application Electric power lines experience faults for many reasons.
  • Page 240: Negative-Sequence Overcurrent Protection 46

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.7 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection 46 4.1.7.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Negative-sequence overcurrent NSPTOC I2> protection 4.1.7.2 Function block A070758-ANSI V1 EN Figure 106: Function block 4.1.7.3 Functionality The negative sequence overcurrent protection 46 is used for increasing sensitivity to...
  • Page 241 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The operation of the negative-sequence overcurrent protection can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. A070660-ANSI V1 EN Figure 107: Functional module diagram. I represents negative phase sequence current.
  • Page 242: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions "Inverse reset", the reset time depends on the current during the drop-off situation. If the drop-off situation continues, the reset timer is reset and the PICKUP output is deactivated. The "Inverse reset" selection is only supported with ANSI or user programmable types of the IDMT operating curves.
  • Page 243: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions also provides a back-up protection functionality for the feeder ground-fault protection in solid and low resistance grounded networks. The negative sequence overcurrent protection provides the back-up ground-fault protection on the high voltage side of a delta-wye connected power transformer for ground faults taking place on the wye-connected low voltage side.
  • Page 244 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Trip delay time 40...200000 1000 Trip delay time Operating curve type 1=ANSI Ext Inv 5=ANSI DT Selection of time delay curve type 2=ANSI Very Inv 3=ANSI Norm Inv 4=ANSI Mod Inv 5=ANSI DT 6=LT Ext Inv...
  • Page 245: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.7.8 Monitored data Table 178: 46 Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of pickup time / trip time Enum 1=Enabled Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=Disabled 4.1.7.9 Technical data Table 179: 46 Technical data Characteristic...
  • Page 246: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.8.2 Function block A070688-ANSI V1 EN Figure 108: Function block 4.1.8.3 Functionality The phase discontinuity protection 46PD is used for detecting unbalance situations caused by broken conductors. The function picks up and trips when the unbalance current I exceeds the set limit.
  • Page 247 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The I module calculates the ratio of the negative and positive sequence current. It reports the calculated value to the level detector. Level detector The level detector compares the calculated ratio of negative and positive phase sequence currents to the set Pickup value.
  • Page 248: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.8.5 Application In three-phase distribution and subtransmission network applications the phase discontinuity in one phase can cause an increase of zero-sequence voltage and short overvoltage peaks and also oscillation in the corresponding phase. 46PD is a three-phase protection with DT characteristic, designed for detecting broken conductors in distribution and subtransmission networks.
  • Page 249: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions IECA070698 V1 EN Figure 111: Three-phase current quantities during the broken conductor fault in phase A with the ratio of negative-sequence and positive-sequence currents 4.1.8.6 Signals Table 180: 46PD Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Positive sequence current...
  • Page 250: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.8.7 Settings Table 182: 46PD Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 10...100 Pickup value Trip delay time 100...30000 1000 Trip delay time Table 183: 46PD Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step...
  • Page 251: Negative-Sequence Overcurrent Protection For Motors 46M

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.9 Negative-sequence overcurrent protection for motors 46M 4.1.9.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Negative-sequence overcurrent MNSPTOC I2>M protection for motors 4.1.9.2 Function block GUID-CE192548-AC31-4839-A5E1-54984D172B05 V2 EN Figure 112: Function block 4.1.9.3...
  • Page 252 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Timer TRIP Level detector PICKUP BLOCK BLK_RESTART GUID-F890E844-B9C9-4E99-A51F-6EAB19B5239B-ANSI V2 EN Figure 113: Functional module diagram Level detector The calculated negative-sequence current is compared to the Pickup value setting. If the measured value exceeds the Pickup value setting, the function activates the timer module. Timer Once activated, the timer activates the PICKUP output.
  • Page 253: Timer Characteristics

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set trip time. The value is available in the monitored data view. 4.1.9.5 Timer characteristics 46M supports both DT and IDMT characteristics.
  • Page 254 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions If the negative sequence current drops below the Pickup value setting, the reset time is defined as:   = ×     (Equation 6) GUID-8BE4B6AC-FB61-4D30-B77B-3E599D5BAE81 V1 EN t[s] Reset time in seconds Cooling time percentage of pickup time elapse (PICKUP_DUR) When the reset period is initiated, the time for which PICKUP has been active is saved.
  • Page 255: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions depends on the value of the negative-sequence current. If the sum reaches zero without a fault being detected, the accumulation stops and the timer is reset. • If the reset time set through the Cooling time setting elapses without a fault being detected, the timer is reset.
  • Page 256: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 187: 46M Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN Overheated machine reconnection blocking 4.1.9.8 Settings Table 188: 46M Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 0.01...0.50 0.01...
  • Page 257: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.9.9 Monitored data Table 190: 46M Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of pickup time / trip time T_ENARESTART FLOAT32 0.00...7200.00 Estimated time to reset of block restart Enum 1=Enabled Status...
  • Page 258: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.10.2 Function block GUID-7A8FDE81-366E-48B4-AC82-2E999D05ECF8 V2 EN Figure 114: Function block 4.1.10.3 Functionality The phase reversal protection 46R is used to detect the reversed connection of the phases to a three-phase motor by monitoring the negative phase sequence current I of the motor.
  • Page 259: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Timer Once activated, the timer activates the PICKUP output. When the operation timer has reached the set Trip delay time value, the TRIP output is activated. If the fault disappears before the module trips, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value of 200 ms, the operation timer resets and the PICKUP output is deactivated.
  • Page 260: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.10.7 Settings Table 194: 46R Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 0.05...1.00 0.01 0.75 Pickup value Trip delay time 100...60000 Trip delay time Table 195: 46R Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
  • Page 261: Loss Of Load Supervision 37M

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.11 Loss of load supervision 37M 4.1.11.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Loss of load supervision LOFLPTUC 3I< 4.1.11.2 Function block GUID-9EB4ADFD-AE00-4B98-B050-DE8CED6AEEC5-ANSI V3 EN Figure 116: Function block 4.1.11.3 Functionality...
  • Page 262 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Timer PICKUP Level detector 1 TRIP Level detector 2 BLOCK GUID-4A6308B8-47E8-498D-A268-1386EBBBEC8F-ANSI V1 EN Figure 117: Functional module diagram Level detector 1 This module compares the phase currents (RMS value) to the set Pickup value high setting.
  • Page 263: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.11.5 Application When a motor runs with a load connected, it draws a current equal to a value between the no-load value and the rated current of the motor. The minimum load current can be determined by studying the characteristics of the connected load.
  • Page 264: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.11.7 Settings Table 200: 37M Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup value low 0.01...0.50 0.01 0.10 Current setting/Pickup value low Pickup value high 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.50 Current setting/Pickup value high Trip delay time 400...600000 2000...
  • Page 265: Motor Load Jam Protection 51Lr

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.12 Motor load jam protection 51LR 4.1.12.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Motor load jam protection JAMPTOC Ist> 51LR 4.1.12.2 Function block GUID-E6B45EAE-D0FA-4310-AA47-6F03A7B5EBBE V2 EN Figure 118: Function block 4.1.12.3 Functionality...
  • Page 266 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The operation of the motor load jam protection can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Timer Level TRIP detector BLOCK GUID-93025A7F-12BE-4ACD-8BD3-C144CB73F65A-ANSI V1 EN Figure 119: Functional module diagram Level detector...
  • Page 267: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.12.5 Application The motor protection during stall is primarily needed to protect the motor from excessive temperature rise, as the motor draws large currents during the stall phase. This condition causes a temperature rise in the stator windings. Due to reduced speed, the temperature also rises in the rotor.
  • Page 268: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.12.7 Settings Table 206: 51LR Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Pickup value 0.10...10.00 0.01 2.50 Pickup value Trip delay time 100...120000 2000 Trip delay time Reset delay time...
  • Page 269: Loss Of Phase 37

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.13 Loss of phase 37 4.1.13.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Phase undercurrent protection PHPTUC1 3I< 4.1.13.2 Function block GUID-ED7916D7-8083-4660-B274-252DA7DCB833-ANSI V1 EN Figure 120: Function block 4.1.13.3 Functionality The phase undercurrent protection 37 is used to detect an undercurrent that is considered...
  • Page 270 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-7B0FC64E-8C0B-4742-8252-522B91EFC4BC-ANSI V1 EN Figure 121: Functional module diagram Level detector 1 This module compares the phase currents (RMS value) to the Pickup value setting. The Operation mode setting can be used to select the "Three Phase" or "Single Phase" mode. If in the "Three Phase"...
  • Page 271: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the trip timer resets and the PICKUP output is deactivated. The timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set trip time. The value is available through the monitored data view.
  • Page 272: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 210: 37 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip TRIP_A BOOLEAN Trip phase A TRIP_B BOOLEAN Trip phase B TRIP_C BOOLEAN Trip phase C PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup PICKUP_A BOOLEAN Pickup phase A PICKUP_B BOOLEAN Pickup phase B...
  • Page 273: Technical Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.1.13.9 Technical data Table 214: 37 Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current measured: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Pickup time Typically <55 ms Reset time <40 ms...
  • Page 274: Operation Principle

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 59 includes both definite time (DT) and inverse definite minimum time (IDMT) characteristics for the delay of the trip. The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block function outputs, timer or the function itself, if desired. 4.2.1.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
  • Page 275 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions For a more detailed description of the IDMT curves and the use of the Curve Sat Relative setting, see the IDMT curve saturation of the over voltage protection section in this manual. Phase selection logic If the fault criteria are fulfilled in the level detector, the phase selection logic detects the phase or phases in which the fault level is detected.
  • Page 276 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 215: The reset time functionality when the IDMT trip time curve is selected Type of reset curve Description of operation “Immediate” The trip timer is reset instantaneously when drop-off occurs. “Def time reset” The trip timer is frozen during drop-off.
  • Page 277: Timer Characteristics

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT trip times. The Minimum trip time setting parameter defines the minimum desired trip time for IDMT. The setting is applicable only when the IDMT curves are used. The Minimum trip time setting should be used with care because the operation time is according to the IDMT curve, but always at least the value of the Minimum trip time setting.
  • Page 278: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Operating curve type (18) Inv. Curve B (19) Inv. Curve C (20) Programmable 4.2.1.6 Application Overvoltage in a network occurs either due to the transient surges on the network or due to prolonged power frequency overvoltages. Surge arresters are used to protect the network against the transient overvoltages, but the relay's protection function is used to protect against power frequency overvoltages.
  • Page 279: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 218: 59 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup 4.2.1.8 Settings Table 219: 59 Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 0.05...1.60 0.01 1.10 Pickup value Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01...
  • Page 280: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Curve Sat Relative 0.0...3.0 Tuning parameter to avoid curve discontinuities Voltage selection 1=phase-to-earth 2=phase-to-phase Parameter to select phase or phase-to-phase 2=phase-to-phase voltages Relative hysteresis 1.0...5.0 Relative hysteresis for operation 4.2.1.9 Monitored data Table 221:...
  • Page 281: Three-Phase Undervoltage Protection 27

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.2 Three-phase undervoltage protection 27 4.2.2.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase undervoltage protection PHPTUV 3U< 4.2.2.2 Function block GUID-B4A78A17-67CA-497C-B2F1-BC4F1DA415B6-ANSI V1 EN Figure 125: Function block 4.2.2.3 Functionality The three-phase undervoltage protection 27 is used to disconnect from the network...
  • Page 282 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-9D762D4C-404B-4F4B-93A9-B1F071DF12F2-ANSI V1 EN Figure 126: Functional module diagram Level detector The fundamental frequency component of the measured three phase voltages are compared phase-wise to the set Pickup value. If the measured value is lower than the set value of the Pickup value setting, the level detector enables the phase selection logic module.
  • Page 283 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Timer Once activated, the Timer activates the PICKUP output. Depending on the value of the set Operating curve type, the time characteristics are selected according to DT or IDMT. For a detailed description of the voltage IDMT curves, see the IDMT curves for under voltage protection section in this manual.
  • Page 284 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-EE729648-3D09-4EBE-B662-80E59DA7C0A4-ANSI V2 EN Figure 127: Behavior of different IDMT reset modes. The value for Type of reset curve is “Def time reset”. Also other reset modes are presented for the time integrator. The Time multiplier setting is used for scaling the IDMT trip times. The Minimum trip time setting parameter defines the minimum desired trip time for IDMT.
  • Page 285: Timer Characteristics

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The Timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set trip time. The value is available in the Monitored data view. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode.
  • Page 286: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions of a blackout. 27 is also used to initiate voltage correction measures, such as insertion of shunt capacitor banks, to compensate for a reactive load and thereby to increase the voltage. 27 can be used to disconnect from the network devices, such as electric motors, which are damaged when subjected to service under low voltage conditions.
  • Page 287: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.2.8 Settings Table 227: 27 Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 0.05...1.20 0.01 0.90 Pickup value Time multiplier 0.05...15.00 0.01 1.00 Time multiplier in IEC/ANSI IDMT curves Trip delay time 60...300000 Trip delay time Operating curve type...
  • Page 288: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.2.9 Monitored data Table 229: 27 Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of pickup time / trip time Enum 1=Enabled Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=Disabled 4.2.2.10 Technical data Table 230: 27 Technical data Characteristic...
  • Page 289: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.3.2 Function block GUID-F809C4BA-65E7-46D0-A46A-F51E7B90F1BA-ANSI V1 EN GUID-AC9C406F-1A77-4135-A0A4-6F726EB18E1E V1 EN Figure 128: Function block 4.2.3.3 Functionality The residual overvoltage protection 59G/N is used in distribution networks where the ground overvoltage can reach non-acceptable levels in, for example, high impedance grounding.
  • Page 290: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Level detector The measured ground voltage is compared to the set Pickup value. If the value exceeds the set Pickup value, the level detector sends an enable signal to the timer. Timer Once activated, the timer activates the PICKUP output. The time characteristic is according to DT.
  • Page 291: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Therefore, this function is often used as a back-up protection or as a release signal for the feeder ground-fault protection. The protection can also be used for the ground-fault protection of generators and motors and for the unbalance protection of capacitor banks.
  • Page 292: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.3.8 Monitored data Table 235: 59G/N Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of pickup time / trip time 59G/N Enum 1=Enabled Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=Disabled 4.2.3.9 Technical data Table 236: 59N Technical data Characteristic...
  • Page 293: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.4.2 Function block GUID-CDC32940-936F-4DC6-8E78-1F4D7965EA96-ANSI V1 EN Figure 130: Function block 4.2.4.3 Functionality The negative-sequence overvoltage protection 47 is used to detect negative-sequence overvoltage conditions. 47 is used for the protection of machines. he function picks up when the negative-sequence voltage exceeds the set limit. 47 operates with the definite time (DT) characteristics.
  • Page 294: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Timer Once activated, the timer activates the PICKUP output. The time characteristic is according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value set by Trip delay time, the TRIP output is activated if the overvoltage condition persists. If the negative- sequence voltage normalizes before the module trips, the reset timer is activated.
  • Page 295: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions If the machines have an unbalance protection of their own, the 47 operation can be applied as a backup protection or it can be used as an alarm. The latter can be applied when it is not required to trip loads tolerating voltage unbalance better than the rotating machines.
  • Page 296: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.4.8 Monitored data Table 241: 47 Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of pickup time / trip time Enum 1=Enabled Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=Disabled 4.2.4.9 Technical data Table 242: 47 Technical data Characteristic...
  • Page 297: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.5.2 Function block GUID-24EBDE8B-E1FE-47B0-878B-EBEC13A27CAC-ANSI V1 EN Figure 132: Function block 4.2.5.3 Functionality The positive-sequence undervoltage protection 27PS is used to detect positive-sequence undervoltage conditions. 27PS is used for the protection of small power generation plants. The function helps in isolating an embedded plant from a fault line when the fault current fed by the plant is too low to cause an overcurrent function to pickup but high enough to maintain the arc.
  • Page 298 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Level detector The calculated positive-sequence voltage is compared to the set Pickup value setting. If the value drops below the set Pickup value, the level detector enables the timer. The Relative hysteresis setting can be used for preventing unnecessary oscillations if the input signal slightly varies from the Pickup value setting.
  • Page 299: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.5.5 Application 27PS can be applied for protecting a power station used for embedded generation when network faults like short circuits or phase-to-ground faults in a transmission or a distribution line cause a potentially dangerous situations for the power station. A network fault can be dangerous for the power station for various reasons.
  • Page 300: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.5.6 Signals Table 243: 27PS Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Positive phase sequence voltage BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode Table 244: 27PS Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip...
  • Page 301: Technical Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.5.9 Technical data Table 248: 27PS Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured voltage: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × V Minimum Typical Maximum 1)2) Pickup time...
  • Page 302: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.6.2 Function block GUID-C6ADAB46-AACD-44FA-BCFB-8EF872CB171B V1 EN Figure 134: Function block 4.2.6.3 Functionality The overexcitation protection 24 is used to protect generators and power transformers against an excessive flux density and saturation of the magnetic core. The function calculates the V/f ratio (volts/hertz) proportional to the excitation level of the generator or transformer and compares this value to the setting limit.
  • Page 303 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-93ECF983-CCBB-4277-8E7B-7EC43743A375 V1 EN Figure 135: Functional module diagram V/f calculation This module calculates the V/f ratio, that is, the excitation level from the internal induced voltage (E) and frequency. The actual measured voltage (V ) deviates from the internal induced voltage (emf) E, a value the equipment has to withstand.
  • Page 304 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Voltage selection setting Phase supervision Calculation of internal induced voltage (emf) E setting phase-to-phase B or BC − × × leak GUID-AF78379A-78B9-466A-85E1-593333656FB8 V2 EN phase-to-phase C or CA − × × leak GUID-90521B6F-C9B3-411F-82AD-E5AAF3D3ACEA V2 EN Pos sequence ×...
  • Page 305 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions If the input frequency (f ) is less than 20 percent of the nominal frequency (f ), the calculation of the excitation level is disabled and forced to zero value. This means that the function is blocked from picking up and tripping during a low-frequency condition.
  • Page 306: Timer Characteristics

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Timer calculates the pickup duration value PICKUP_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the pickup situation and the set trip time. The value is available in the Monitored data view. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking functionality. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting Configuration/System/Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode.
  • Page 307 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The tripping time of the function block can vary much between different operating curve types even if other setting parameters for the curves were not changed. Once activated, the timer activates the PICKUP output for the IDMT curves. If the excitation level drops below the Pickup value setting before the function trips, the reset timer is activated.
  • Page 308 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-47898DF5-3AC0-4EFC-AC30-23A0BBECE133 V1 EN Figure 136: An example of a delayed reset in the inverse time characteristics. When the pickup becomes active during the reset period, the trip time counter continues from the level corresponding to the drop-off (reset time = 0.50 · Cooling time) Overexcitation IDMT curves 1, 2 and 3 The base equation for the IDMT curves "OvExt IDMT Crv1", "OvExt IDMT Crv2"...
  • Page 309 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 250: Parameters a, b and c for different IDMT curves Operating curve type setting OvExt IDMT Crv1 115.00 4.886 OvExt IDMT Crv2 113.50 3.040 OvExt IDMT Crv3 108.75 2.443 GUID-BD1205DC-1794-4F64-A950-6199C54DB7B1 V1 EN Figure 137: Trip time curves for the overexcitation IDMT curve ("OvExt IDMT Crv1") for parameters a = 2.5, b = 115.0 and c = 4.886 Overexcitation IDMT curve 4...
  • Page 310 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 0 18 1000 − (Equation 11) GUID-E9F10438-C3F2-4440-AB4B-32C2EB17CF72 V1 EN t(s) the trip time in seconds Constant delay setting in seconds the excitation value (V/f ratio or volts/hertz) in pu Time multiplier setting GUID-6FC7624E-7E13-4645-8943-0FDFBAA1D184 V1 EN Figure 138: Trip time curves for the overexcitation IDMT curve 4 ("OvExt IDMT Crv4") for different values of the Time multiplier setting when the Constant delay...
  • Page 311: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions restart time, given in Equation 12. The Restart Ena level setting determines the level when BLK_RESTART should be released. − Ena restart level   enable restart time  ⋅ Cooling time   ...
  • Page 312 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions excessive heating and severe damage to the insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively short time. Overvoltage, underfrequency or a combination of the two, results in an excessive flux density level. Since the flux density is directly proportional to the voltage and inversely proportional to the frequency, the overexcitation protection calculates the relative V/Hz ratio instead of measuring the flux density directly.
  • Page 313 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Leakage reactance (X 20% or 0.2 pu leak Measured voltage and load currents of the machine Phase A-to-phase B voltage (V 11500∠0° V Phase A current (I 5600∠-63.57° A Phase B current (I 5600∠176.42° A Measured frequency (f 49.98 Hz The setting...
  • Page 314 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Usually, the V/f characteristics are specified so that the ratio is 1.00 at the nominal voltage and nominal frequency. Therefore, the value 100 percent for the setting Voltage Max Cont is recommended. If the Voltage Max Cont setting is 105 percent, the excitation level M of the machine is calculated with the equation.
  • Page 315 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-433F1AF8-DA0B-4FEA-A281-1872487F3B97 V1 EN Figure 140: Tripping curve of "OvExt IDMT Crv2" based on the settings specified in example 3. The two dots marked on the curve are referred to in the text. If the excitation level stays at 1.26, the tripping occurs after 26360 milliseconds as per the marked dot in Figure 140.
  • Page 316: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Time multiplier = 5, Maximum trip time = 3600000 milliseconds and Constant delay = 800 milliseconds. GUID-78B05F4B-3434-4DD5-89F6-17F099444C04 V1 EN Figure 141: Tripping curve of “OvExt IDMT Crv4” based on the specified settings. The two dots marked on the curve are referred to in the text. If the excitation level stays at 1.25, the tripping occurs after 15200 milliseconds.
  • Page 317: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Name Type Default Description V_A_AB SIGNAL Phase-to-ground voltage A or phase-to-phase voltage V_B_BC SIGNAL Phase-to-ground voltage B or phase-to-phase voltage V_C_CA SIGNAL Phase-to-ground voltage C or phase-to-phase voltage SIGNAL Positive-phase sequence voltage SIGNAL Measured frequency BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False...
  • Page 318: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 254: 24 Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 5=disable Operation Mode Disable/Enable 5=disable Cooling time 5...10000 Time required to cool the machine Constant delay 100...120000 Parameter constant delay Reset delay time 0...60000 Resetting time of the trip time counter in DT...
  • Page 319: Technical Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.6.10 Technical data Table 256: 24 Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured: f ±2 Hz ±2.5% of the set value or 0.01 × Ub/f Frequency change Typically 200 ms (±20 1)2) Pickup time...
  • Page 320: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.7.2 Function block V_A_AB TRIP V_B_BC PICKUP V_C_CA BLOCK GUID-5676E44B-85C1-4F11-84D5-AB775D9E2582 V1 EN Figure 142: Function block 4.2.7.3 Functionality Systems with critical motor applications may provide backup power sources to those motors that can be switched in when an undervoltage on the original power source is detected.
  • Page 321 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Timer V_A_AB Phase TRIP Level V_B_BC selection detector logic V_C_CA PICKUP Blocking BLOCK logic GUID-1F833D04-EA04-427E-BC3D-2BFE5E694FFC V1 EN Figure 143: Functional module diagram Level detector The fundamental frequency component of the measured three-phase voltages over the range of 10...70 Hz is compared phase-wise to the set Pickup value .
  • Page 322: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay program. The influence of the BLOCK input signal activation is preselected with the global Blocking mode setting. The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the trip timer is frozen to the prevailing value.
  • Page 323: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.7.6 Signals Table 257: 27R Input signals Name Type Default Description V_A_AB SIGNAL Phase to ground voltage A or phase to phase voltage AB V_B_BC SIGNAL Phase to ground voltage B or phase to phase voltage BC V_C_CA SIGNAL Phase to ground voltage C or phase to phase voltage...
  • Page 324: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.2.7.8 Monitored data Table 261: 27R Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of pickup time / trip time REM_V_A FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Remanent voltage on phase A REM_V_B FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Remanent voltage on phase B REM_V_C...
  • Page 325: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.3.1.2 Function block TRIP dF/dt TRIP_UFRQ BLOCK TRIP_OFRQ TRIP_FRG PICKUP PICKUP_UFRQ PICKUP_OFRQ PICKUP_FRG GUID-8B7AA565-288B-42EA-961B-A9F7B93E47F0-ANSI V3 EN Figure 144: Function block 4.3.1.3 Functionality The frequency protection 81 is used to protect network components against abnormal frequency conditions.
  • Page 326 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Over/under frequency detection The frequency detection module includes an overfrequency or underfrequency detection based on the Operation mode setting. In the “Freq>” mode, the measured frequency is compared to the set Pickup value Freq>. If the measured value exceeds the set value of the Pickup value Freq>...
  • Page 327 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 263: Operation modes for operation logic Operation mode Description Freq< The function trips independently as the underfrequency ("Freq<") protection function. When the measured frequency is below the set value of the Pickup value Freq< setting, the module activates the PICKUP and PICKUP_UFRQ outputs.
  • Page 328 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Operation mode Description Freq< + df/dt A consecutive operation is enabled between the protection methods. When the measured frequency Pickup value Freq< is below the set value of the setting, the frequency gradient protection is enabled. After the frequency has dropped below the set value, the frequency gradient is compared to the set value Pickup value df/dt setting.
  • Page 329 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Operation mode Description Freq> + df/dt A consecutive operation is enabled between the protection methods. When the measured frequency Pickup value Freq> exceeds the set value of the setting, the frequency gradient protection is enabled. After the frequency exceeds the set value, the frequency gradient is compared to the set value of Pickup value df/dt setting.
  • Page 330 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Operation mode Description Freq> OR df/dt A parallel operation between the protection methods is enabled. The PICKUP output is activated when either of the measured values of the protection module exceeds its set value. Detailed information about the active module is available at the PICKUP_OFRQ and PICKUP_FRG outputs.
  • Page 331: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay's program. The influence of the BLOCK signal activation is preselected with the global setting Blocking mode. The Blocking mode setting has three blocking methods. In the "Freeze timers" mode, the trip timer is frozen to the prevailing value, but the TRIP output is not deactivated when blocking is activated.
  • Page 332: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions smaller power systems where the loss of a large generator requires quick remedial actions to secure the power system integrity. In such situations, the load shedding actions are required at a rather high frequency level. However, in combination with a large negative frequency gradient, the underfrequency protection can be used at a high setting.
  • Page 333: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 268: 81 Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Reset delay Tm Freq 0...60000 Reset delay time for frequency Reset delay Tm df/dt 0...60000 Reset delay time for rate of change 4.3.1.8...
  • Page 334: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.3.2.2 Function block GUID-6F539BC7-2BC6-4469-97BC-A6282B4C63E8 V2 EN Figure 146: Function block 4.3.2.3 Functionality The load-shedding and restoration function 81LSH is capable of performing load- shedding based on underfrequency and the rate of change of the frequency. The load that is shed during the frequency disturbance can be restored once the frequency has stabilized to the normal level.
  • Page 335 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-B2B8836B-7D03-4656-902D-D748F164B268 V2 EN Figure 147: Functional module diagram Underfrequency detection The underfrequency detection measures the input frequency calculated from the voltage signal. An underfrequency is detected when the measured frequency drops below the set value of the Pickup value Freq setting.
  • Page 336 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions value set by Trip Tm df/dt, the OPR_FRG output is activated if the df/dt condition still persists. If df/dt becomes normal before the module trips, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value of the Reset delay time setting, the timer resets and the ST_FRG output is deactivated.
  • Page 337 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Frequency Pickup value Freq set at 0.975 xFn [Hz] Pickup value df/dt set at -0.020 xFn/s Trip Tm df/dt = 500ms 60 Hz Trip Tm Freq = 1000ms Load shed mode = Freq< AND df/dt 58.8 Hz 58.5 Hz Time [s]...
  • Page 338 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Frequency Pickup value Freq set at 0.975 xFn [Hz] Pickup value df/dt set at -0.020 xFn/s Trip Tm df/dt = 500ms 60 Hz Trip Tm Freq = 1000ms Load shed mode = Freq< AND df/dt 58.8 Hz Time [s] ST_FRG...
  • Page 339 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Restoring mode Description Disabled Load restoration is disabled. Auto In the “Auto” mode, input frequency is continuously compared to the Restore pickup Val setting. The restore detection module includes a timer with the DT characteristics.
  • Page 340: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions blocking is activated. In the "Block all" mode, the whole function is blocked and the timers are reset. In the "Block TRIP output" mode, the function operates normally but the TRIP, OPR_FRQ and OPR_FRG outputs are not activated. 4.3.2.5 Application An AC power system operates at a defined rated frequency.
  • Page 341 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions stepwise in such a way that it does not lead the system back to the emergency condition. This is done through an operator intervention or in case of remote location through an automatic load restoration function. The load restoration function also detects the system frequency and restores the load if the system frequency remains above the value of the set restoration frequency for a predefined duration.
  • Page 342 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The value of the setting has to be well below the lowest occurring normal frequency and well above the lowest acceptable frequency of the system. The setting level, the number of steps and the distance between two steps (in time or in frequency) depend on the characteristics of the power system under consideration.
  • Page 343: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 272: Setting for a five-step df/dt< operation Load-shedding steps Pickup value df/dt setting Trip Tm df/dt setting -0.005 · Fn /s (-0.25 Hz/s) 8000 ms -0.010 · Fn /s (-0.25 Hz/s) 2000 ms -0.015 ·...
  • Page 344: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Name Type Description ST_FRG BOOLEAN Pick-Up signal for high df/dt detection RESTORE BOOLEAN Restore signal for load restoring purposes ST_REST BOOLEAN Restore frequency attained and restore timer started 4.3.2.7 Settings Table 276: 81LSH Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
  • Page 345: Technical Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.3.2.9 Technical data Table 279: 81LSH Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy f< ±10 mHz df/dt ±100 mHz/s (in range |df/dt| < 5 Hz/s) ± 2.0% of the set value (in range 5 Hz/s < |df/dt| < 15 Hz/s) Pickup time f<...
  • Page 346: Operation Principle

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 32P executes on the direction of positive-sequence power and not the value. If overpower or underpower is needed, refer to 32O and 32U. 32P is generally used for directional controls. 4.4.1.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “Enable”...
  • Page 347 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The sector limits are always given as positive degree values. The Characteristic angle setting is also known as Relay Characteristic Angle (RCA), Relay Base Angle or Maximum Torque Line. RCA=+45 deg Max forward angle Min reverse Min forward angle...
  • Page 348: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Blocking logic The binary input BLOCK can be used to block the function. The activation of the BLOCK input deactivates the RELEASE output and resets Timer. 4.4.1.5 Application The three-phase directional power protection 32P improves the possibility to obtain a selective function of the overcurrent protection in meshed networks.
  • Page 349: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 283: 32P Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 5=disable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Reset delay time 0...60000 Reset delay time Min trip current 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.10 Minimum trip current Min trip voltage 0.01...1.00...
  • Page 350: Functionality

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.4.2.3 Functionality Ground directional power protection 32N is used to detect negative or residual power direction. The output of the function is used for blocking or releasing other functions in protection scheme. In negative-sequence voltage selection, if the angle difference between negative- sequence voltage and negative-sequence current is in a predefined direction (either in forward or reverse direction), 32N gives a release signal after a definite time delay.
  • Page 351 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions DIRECTION Timer RELEASE Directional detector RCA_ CTL Low level blocking Blocking BLOCK logic GUID-C8755615-9FDA-41DD-9245-DBA7EC6A77CB-ANSI V1 EN Figure 155: Functional module diagram Directional detector When "Neg. seq. volt." selection is made using Pol signal Sel, the Directional detector module compares the angle of the negative-sequence current (I2) to the negative-sequence voltage (-V2).
  • Page 352 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions RCA=+45 deg forward angle forward reverse angle angle Min trip voltage reverse angle Min trip current GUID-4C549313-56D5-4D7A-8E3C-37885AF1BF82-ANSI V1 EN Figure 156: Configurable directional setting when "Neg. seq. volt." selection is made using Pol signal Sel. When "Measured VG"...
  • Page 353 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Characteristic angle/ RCA = 0 deg Max torque line -VG ( polarizing quantity) IG ( operating quantity) Min forward Max forward angle angle Zero torque line Non-operating area Non-operating area Min trip voltage Max reverse Min reverse angle angle...
  • Page 354 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions -VG( polarizing quantity) RCA=+60 deg Characteristic Min forward Angle/ Max torque angle line IG (operating quantity) Max reverse Forward angle Backward area area Max forward angle Min trip voltage Min reverse angle Zero torque line Min trip current GUID-93E8B2C8-DF59-47A9-BD3F-E4098C330A53-ANSI V1 EN Figure 158:...
  • Page 355 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions a negative value if operating signal IG or IN leads the polarizing quantity –VG or –VN, respectively. Table 285: Recommended Characteristic angle setting for different network Type of network Characteristic angle recommended Compensated network 0°...
  • Page 356: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Timer Once activated, the internal operating timer is started. The Timer characteristic is according to DT. When Timer has reached the value of Release delay time, the RELEASE output is activated. If a drop-off situation happens, that is, if the operating current moves out of the operating sector or signal amplitudes drop below the minimum levels, before Release delay time is exceeded, the Timer reset state is activated.
  • Page 357: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.4.2.7 Settings Table 289: 32N Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Release delay time 0...1000 Release delay time Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode 2=Forward 3=Reverse Characteristic angle -179...180 Characteristic angle Max forward angle 0...180 Maximum phase angle in forward direction...
  • Page 358: Three-Phase Directional Overpower Protection 32O

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.4.3 Three-phase directional overpower protection 32O 4.4.3.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase directional overpower DOPPDPR P> protection 4.4.3.2 Function block TRIP PICKUP BLOCK BLK_TRIP BLK_PICKUP FR_ TIMER GUID-F3F299DA-FB9A-47F0-ADCE-B910F720E98C V1 EN Figure 160:...
  • Page 359 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Level detector Timer TRIP Power calculation PICKUP U_AB U_BC Directional U_CA calculation BLOCK BLK_TRIP BLK_PICKUP FR_TIMER GUID-7AABB604-0901-4815-841F-352961249261 V1 EN Figure 161: Functional module diagram Power calculation This module calculates the apparent power based on the selected voltages and currents. The Measurement mode setting determines which voltages and currents are used.
  • Page 360 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The calculated powers S, P, Q and the power factor angle PF_ANGL are available in the Monitored data view. Level detector The Level detector compares the magnitude of the measured apparent power to the set Start value.
  • Page 361 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Operating area Start value  Non operating area GUID-27F1C899-F8E0-43F6-8326-8F7DCD5E9007 V2 EN Figure 163: Operating characteristics with the Start Value setting, Power angle (α) being +45 and Directional mode "Forward" Timer Once activated, the Timer activates the PICKUP output. The time characteristics are according to DT.
  • Page 362: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.4.3.5 Application 32O is used to provide protection against an excessive power flow in the set operating direction. The main application is the protection of generators and turbines. It can also be used in feeder protection applications, for example, the ring network. 32O in the forward direction can be used to protect the generators or motors from delivering or consuming excess power.
  • Page 363 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions to obtain information from the engine manufacturer and to measure the reverse power during commissioning. Reverse overpower can also act as an alternative for an under excitation protection in case of small generators. If the field excitation is reduced, the generator may start importing the reactive power, making the generator run as an asynchronous generator.
  • Page 364: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Operating operating area area operating area Operating area GUID-37C694E9-74A9-4E39-A529-86B6A7FFAA6F V2 EN Figure 165: Reverse active overpower characteristics (a) and reverse reactive overpower characteristics (b) 4.4.3.6 Signals Table 293: 32O Input signals Name Type Default Description GROUP Group signal for current inputs...
  • Page 365: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.4.3.7 Settings Table 295: 32O Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 0.01...2.00 0.01 1.00 Pickup value Trip delay time 40...300000 Trip delay time Directional mode 1=Non-directional 2=Forward Directional mode 2=Forward 3=Reverse Power angle...
  • Page 366: Technical Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.4.3.9 Technical data Table 298: 32O Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy At the frequency f = f ±3% of the set value or ±0.002 × S Phase angle: ±2° Typically 20 ms (±15 ms) 1)2) Pickup time Reset time...
  • Page 367: Functionality

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.4.4.3 Functionality The underpower protection 32U is used for protecting generators and prime movers against the effects of very low power outputs or reverse power condition. The function operates when the measured active power falls below the set value. The operating characteristics are according to definite time DT.
  • Page 368 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 299: Power calculation Measurement mode setting Power calculation PhsA, PhsB, PhsC U_A, U_B, U_C, I_A, I_B, I_C Arone U_AB, U_BC, I_A, I_C Pos Seq {U_A, U_B, U_C} or {U_AB, U_BC, U_CA} and I_A, I_B, I_C PhsAB U_AB, I_A, I_B...
  • Page 369 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Operating operating area area Start Value GUID-D4104D30-04BC-4FE5-978A-1401F1D5301F V2 EN Figure 168: Operating characteristics of 32U with setting Start value Timer Once activated, the Timer activates the PICKUP output. The time characteristics are according to DT. When the operation timer has reached the value of Trip delay time, the TRIP output is activated.
  • Page 370: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions be used to block the TRIP signal. The operation timer counting can be frozen on the prevailing value by activation of the FR_TIMER input. 4.4.4.5 Application The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy into electrical energy.
  • Page 371: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Name Type Default Description DISABLE BOOLEAN FALSE Signal to block the function during generator startup BLK_TRIP BOOLEAN FALSE Block signal for operate output BLK_PICKUP BOOLEAN FALSE Block signal for start FR_TIMER BOOLEAN FALSE Freeze signal for timer Table 301: 32U Output signals Name...
  • Page 372: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.4.4.8 Monitored data Table 304: 32U Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of pickup time / trip time FLOAT32 -160.000...160.0 Active power FLOAT32 -160.000...160.0 Reactive power FLOAT32 -160.000...160.0 Apparent power PF_ANGLE FLOAT32...
  • Page 373: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Power factor MPUPF PF< 4.4.5.2 Function block TRIP PICKUP ALARM DISABLE BLOCK GUID-C44ECC34-D5FE-4068-B168-6672A1EB2DDB V1 EN Figure 169: Function block 4.4.5.3 Functionality The under power factor function 55 is used to provide out-of-step and loss of, or under excitation protection for small synchronous motors and generators.
  • Page 374 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Timer1 TRIP Power Level factor detector 1 calculation PICKUP Timer2 DISABLE Level ALARM detector 2 Blocking BLOCK logic GUID-A6E041B1-7F1D-45C0-A69A-154AF835A9B2 V1 EN Figure 170: Functional module diagram Power factor calculation This module calculates three phase power factor using phase currents and voltages. The three-phase power is calculated from the fundamental frequency components (DFT) of the phase-to-earth voltages and phase-to-earth currents.
  • Page 375 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Generator convention Motor convention Forward reactive power Forward reactive power Synchronous Induction Induction Generator motor generator motor PF<0 (lead) PF>0 (lag) PF<0 (lead) PF>0 (lag) (PF = -1.0) (PF = -1.0) (PF = 1.0) (PF = 1.0) PF<0 (lag) PF<0 (lag)
  • Page 376: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Timer 1 Once activated, the Timer 1 activates the PICKUP output. The timer characteristic is according to DT. When the trip timer has reached the value set by Pickup delay time in the DT mode, the TRIP output is activated. If a drop-off situation occurs, that is, a power factor improves and exceeds the Pickup reset value in the direction as defined by Dir pickup reset value before the trip delay is exceeded or either magnitude of all three phase current or voltages goes below Current block value and Voltage block value respectively,...
  • Page 377: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions typically set to operate when the current into a motor lags more than 30 degrees, that is, a power factor goes below +0.87 lagging. The function provides alarm facility which can be used as an early indication that the power factor is moving outside the allowable range;...
  • Page 378: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 307: 55 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm 4.4.5.7 Settings Table 308: 55 Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Dir pickup value 1=Lagging 1=Lagging PF direction for pickup value...
  • Page 379: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.4.5.8 Monitored data Table 310: 55 Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of pickup time / trip time FLOAT32 -1.00...1.00 Calculated value of the 3– phase power factor Enum 1=Enabled Status...
  • Page 380: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.5.1.2 Function block A07069-ANSI V2 EN Figure 172: Function block 4.5.1.3 Functionality The increased utilization of power systems closer to the thermal limits has generated a need for a thermal overload function for power lines as well. A thermal overload is in some cases not detected by other protection functions, and the introduction of the thermal overload function 49F allows the protected circuit to operate closer to the thermal limits.
  • Page 381 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions A070747-ANSI V2 EN Figure 173: Functional module diagram. I_A, I_B and I_C represent phase currents. Max current selector The max current selector of the function continuously checks the highest measured TRMS phase current value. The selector reports the highest value to the temperature estimator. Temperature estimator The final temperature rise is calculated from the highest of the three-phase currents according to the expression:...
  • Page 382 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions ∆   −   Θ Θ Θ − Θ ⋅ − τ − final −     (Equation 21) A070781 V2 EN Θ calculated present temperature Θ calculated temperature at previous time step Θ...
  • Page 383: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions setting) via a control parameter that is located under the clear menu. This is useful during testing when secondary injected current has given a calculated false temperature level.    Θ − Θ final lockout release = −...
  • Page 384: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions In stressed situations in the power system, the lines and cables may be required to be overloaded for a limited time. This should be done without any risk for the above- mentioned risks. The thermal overload protection provides information that makes temporary overloading of cables and lines possible.
  • Page 385: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.5.1.7 Settings Table 314: 49F Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Env temperature set -50...100 °C Ambient temperature used when AmbiSens is set to Off Current multiplier 1...5 Current multiplier when function is used for parallel lines Current reference 0.05...4.00...
  • Page 386: Technical Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.5.1.9 Technical data Table 317: 49F Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz Current measurement: ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I (at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 ×...
  • Page 387: Operation Principle

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions function using a thermal model with two settable time constants. If the temperature rise continues, 49T operates based on the thermal model of the transformer. After a thermal overload operation, the re-energizing of the transformer is inhibited during the transformer cooling time.
  • Page 388 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The ambient temperature value is added to the calculated final temperature rise estimation. If the total value of temperature is higher than the set trip temperature level, the PICKUP output is activated. The Current reference setting is a steady-state current that gives the steady-state end temperature value Temperature rise.
  • Page 389 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions the share of the steep part of the heating curve. When Weighting factor p =1, only Short- time constant is used. When Weighting factor p = 0, only Long time constant is used. GUID-E040FFF4-7FE3-4736-8E5F-D96DB1F1B16B V1 EN Figure 176: Effect of the Weighting factor p factor and the difference between the two time constants and one time constant models...
  • Page 390: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions temperature Set setting is also used when the ambient temperature measurement connected to 49T is set to “Not in use” in the X130 (RTD) function. The temperature calculation is initiated from the value defined with the Initial temperature and Max temperature setting parameters.
  • Page 391 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions During stressed situations in power systems, it is required to overload the transformers for a limited time without any risks. The thermal overload protection provides information and makes temporary overloading of transformers possible. The permissible load level of a power transformer is highly dependent on the transformer cooling system.
  • Page 392: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 318: Conversion table between one and two time constants Short time constant (min) Long time constant (min) Weighting factor p Single time constant (min) The default Max temperature setting is 105°C. This value is chosen since even though the IEC 60076-7 standard recommends 98°C as the maximum allowable temperature in long- time loading, the standard also states that a transformer can withstand the emergency loading for weeks or even months, which may produce the winding temperature of 140°C.
  • Page 393: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 320: 49T Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup ALARM BOOLEAN Thermal Alarm BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN Thermal overload indicator. To inhibite reclose. 4.5.2.7 Settings Table 321: 49T Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step...
  • Page 394: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.5.2.8 Monitored data Table 323: 49T Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description TEMP FLOAT32 -100.0...9999.9 °C The calculated temperature of the protected object TEMP_RL FLOAT32 0.00...99.99 The calculated temperature of the protected object relative to the trip level T_TRIP INT32...
  • Page 395: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.5.3.2 Function block GUID-5552A9D8-ADEF-4153-AB1A-0C97F97D15EB V3 EN Figure 177: Function block 4.5.3.3 Functionality Thermal overload protection for motors function 49M protects the electric motors from overheating. 49M models the thermal behavior of motor on the basis of the measured load current and disconnects the motor when the thermal content reaches 100 percent.
  • Page 396 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-1E5F2337-DA4E-4F5B-8BEB-27353A6734DC-ANSI V2 EN Figure 178: Functional module diagram Max current selector Max current selector selects the highest measured TRMS phase current and reports it to Thermal level calculator. Internal FLC calculator Full load current (FLC) of the motor is defined by the manufacturer at an ambient temperature of 40°C.
  • Page 397 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 325: Modification of internal FLC Ambient Temperature T Internal FLC <20°C FLC x 1.09 20 to <40°C FLC x (1.18 - T x 0.09/20) 40°C >40 to 65°C FLC x (1 –[(T -40)/100]) >65°C FLC x 0.75 The ambient temperature is used for calculating thermal level and it is available in the...
  • Page 398 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions       −   τ  + × × − × θ     × ×        (Equation 28) GUID-9C893D3E-7CAF-4EA6-B92D-C914288D7CFC V2 EN TRMS value of the measured max of phase currents Rated current , FLC or internal FLC measured negative sequence current...
  • Page 399 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-A19F9DF2-2F04-401F-AE7A-6CE55F88EB1D V2 EN Figure 179: Thermal behavior The required overload factor and negative sequence current heating effect factor are set by the values of the Overload factor and Negative Seq factor settings. In order to accurately calculate the motor thermal condition, different time constants are used in the above equations.
  • Page 400 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The thermal level at the beginning of the startup condition of a motor and at the end of the startup condition is available in the monitored data view at the THERMLEV_ST and THERMLEV_END outputs respectively. The activation of the BLOCK input does not have any effect on these outputs.
  • Page 401 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 3840 1920 GUID-F3D1E6D3-86E9-4C0A-BD43-350003A07292 V1 EN Figure 180: Trip curves when no prior load and p=20...100 %. Overload factor = 1.05. 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 402 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 3840 1920 160 320 480 640 GUID-44A67C51-E35D-4335-BDBD-5CD0D3F41EF1 V1 EN Figure 181: Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p=100 %, Overload factor = 1.05. 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 403 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 3840 1920 GUID-5CB18A7C-54FC-4836-9049-0CE926F35ADF V1 EN Figure 182: Trip curves at prior load 1 x FLC and p=50 %. Overload factor = 1.05. 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 404: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.5.3.5 Application 49M is intended to limit the motor thermal level to predetermined values during the abnormal motor operating conditions. This prevents a premature motor insulation failure. The abnormal conditions result in overheating and include overload, stalling, failure to start, high ambient temperature, restricted motor ventilation, reduced speed operation, frequent starting or jogging, high or low line voltage or frequency, mechanical failure of the driven load, improper installation and unbalanced line voltage or single phasing.
  • Page 405 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions When protecting the objects without hot spot tendencies, for example motors started with soft starters, and cables, the value of Weighting factor p is set to 100 percent. With the value of Weighting factor p set to 100 percent, the thermal level decreases slowly after a heavy load condition.
  • Page 406 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4000 3000 2000 1000 Cold curve 1.05 GUID-B6F9E655-4FFC-4B06-841A-68DADE785BF2 V1 EN 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 407 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Figure 183: The influence of Weighting factor p at prior load 1xFLC, timeconstant = 640 sec, and Overload factor = 1.05 Setting the overload factor The value of Overload factor defines the highest permissible continuous load. The recommended value is 1.05.
  • Page 408: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Negative Seq factor = GUID-DF682702-E6B1-4814-8B2E-31C28F3A03DF V1 EN Setting the thermal restart level The restart disable level can be calculated as follows:   startup time of the motor θ i − × 0 0 % + margin ...
  • Page 409: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 328: 49M Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip ALARM BOOLEAN Thermal Alarm BLK_RESTART BOOLEAN Thermal overload indicator, to inhibit restart 4.5.3.7 Settings Table 329: 49M Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description...
  • Page 410: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.5.3.8 Monitored data Table 331: 49M Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description TEMP_RL FLOAT32 0.00...9.99 The calculated temperature of the protected object relative to the trip level THERMLEV_ST FLOAT32 0.00...9.99 Thermal level at beginning of motor startup THERMLEV_END FLOAT32...
  • Page 411: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.6.1.2 Function block GUID-9B1141EE-E666-4185-A3EF-F77F265D8F15 V1 EN Figure 184: Function block 4.6.1.3 Functionality Motor winding failure protection 87M is a unit protection function. The possibility of internal failures of the motor is relatively low. However, the consequences in terms of cost and production loss are often serious, which makes the differential protection an important protection function.
  • Page 412 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-206742C6-5514-41BE-A4F3-2FE0DA9946D5-ANSI V1 EN Figure 185: Functional module diagram Differential and bias calculation Differential calculation module calculates the differential current. The differential current is the difference in current between the phase and neutral sides of the machine. The phase currents denote the fundamental frequency components on the phase and neutral sides of the current.
  • Page 413 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions object are flowing into it. This causes the biasing current to be considerably smaller, which makes the operation more sensitive during internal faults. The traditional way for calculating the stabilized current is: − (Equation 33) GUID-34FA472E-E419-4A0E-94A3-238D7A3CE5ED V1 EN The module calculates the bias current for all three phases.
  • Page 414 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions to the rated current of the machine or 3.3 times that of Low trip value, whichever is smaller. The temporary extra limit decays exponentially from its maximum value with a time constant of one second. This feature should be used in case of networks where very long time constants are expected.
  • Page 415 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The end of the first section End section 1 can be set at a desired point within the range of 0 to 100 percent (or % I ). Accordingly, the end of the second section End section 2 can be set within the range of 100 percent to 300 percent (or % I The slope of the operating characteristic for the function block varies in different parts of the range.
  • Page 416 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions blocked by the waveform blocking functionality, the INT_BLKD output is activated according to the phase information. The phase angle difference between the two currents I_A1 and I_A2 is theoretically 180 electrical degrees for the external fault and 0 electrical degrees for the internal fault conditions.
  • Page 417: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions [%In] Low trip value [%In] Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 End section 1 End section 2 GUID-295E8CB1-B4A0-4207-A1B2-F542C5D1DF94-ANSI V1 EN Figure 187: Operating characteristic for the stabilized stage of the generator differential protection function 4.6.1.5 Application The differential protection works on the principle of calculating the differential current at...
  • Page 418 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions both the external power system (via the machine or the block circuit breaker) and from the machine itself must be disconnected as fast as possible. The DC restraint feature should be used in case of an application with a long DC time constant in the fault currents is present.
  • Page 419 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions rated burden, the rated burden S , the internal burden S and the actual burden S of the current transformer. ⋅ (Equation 39) GUID-8EFD1AED-A804-45DD-963F-D453A6B3D782 V1 EN Example 1 The rated burden S of the current transformer 5P20 is 10 VA, the secondary rated current 5A, the internal resistance R = 0.07 Ω...
  • Page 420 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The parameter r is the maximum remanence flux density in the CT core in pu from the saturation flux density. The value of the parameter r depends on the magnetic material used and also on the construction of the CT. For instance, if the value r = 0.4, the remanence flux density can be 40 percent of the saturation flux density.
  • Page 421 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Furthermore, the DC time constant (T ) of the fault current is now smaller, assumed to be 50 ms here. Assuming the maximum fault current is 30 percent lower than in the bus fault and a DC offset 90 percent of the maximum.
  • Page 422 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions   I CT  ⋅  I Motor   (Equation 41) GUID-560620F9-50B1-4DA4-AF3F-2B24212080D9 V1 EN rated primary current of the CT, for example, 1500A Motor rated current of the motor under protection, for example, 1000A rated accuracy limit factor of the CT, for example, 30 actual accuracy limit factor due to oversizing the CT, substituting the values in the equation, F = 45...
  • Page 423 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-A6716146-6ECD-46A2-B2AC-4408DDDB7BF6 V1 EN Figure 188: Connection of current transformer of Type 1 GUID-20C85C2F-B738-4E5A-ACE1-7B30EC9799E2 V1 EN Figure 189: Connection of current transformer of Type 2 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 424 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Saturation of current transformers There are basically two types of saturation phenomena that have to be detected: the AC saturation and the DC saturation. The AC saturation is caused by a high fault current where the CT magnetic flux exceeds its maximum value.
  • Page 425: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.6.1.6 Signals Table 333: 87M Input signals Name Type Default Description I_A1 SIGNAL Current ID for getting current values for phase A, winding 1 I_B1 SIGNAL Current ID for getting current values for phase B, winding 1 I_C1 SIGNAL...
  • Page 426: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 336: 87M Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable CT connection type 1=Type 1 1=Type 1 CT connection type. Determined by the 2=Type 2 directions of the connected current transformers...
  • Page 427: Technical Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_ANGL_C2_A2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle Phase CA, neutral side I_ANGL_A1_A2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle diff between line and neutral side, Phase A I_ANGL_B1_B2 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Current phase angle diff between line and neutral side, Phase B I_ANGL_C1_C2...
  • Page 428: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.6.2.2 Function block I_A1 TRIP I_B1 OPR_LS I_C1 OPR_HS I_A2 BLKD2H I_B2 BLKD5H I_C2 BLKDWAV I_A3 I_B3 I_C3 BLOCK BLK_OPR_LS BLK_OPR_HS GUID-2B005C29-6D03-41EF-8CA8-FC4E8D5BB3FB V2 EN Figure 192: Function block 4.6.2.3 Functionality The transformer differential protection 87T provides up to three three-phase current sets or restraints designed for protection of two-winding or three-winding transformers and generator-transformer blocks with a possibility to have two three-phase current sets either on the winding 1 or winding 2 side in case of two-winding transformer protection.
  • Page 429 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Differential I_A1 calculation I_B1 Transformer vector group I_C1 matching TRIP I_A2 Instantaneous Zero- OPR_LS I_B2 high stage sequence component I_C2 OPR_HS elimination I_A3 Compensation I_B3 of tap changer position I_C3 BLK_OPR_HS BLOCK BLK_OPR_LS Second BLKD2H harmonic blocking...
  • Page 430 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-DE3FE5E9-BF02-4053-A632-17B57E660596-ANSI V1 EN Figure 194: Single-line diagram presentation of the positive direction of the currents in a three-winding transformer The normalized amplitude of the differential current per phase I is obtained using the equation: (Equation 42) GUID-B363BDCA-E2A0-490C-A015-2F8125C22F61 V1 EN In a normal situation, no fault occurs in the area protected by 87T.
  • Page 431 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions − − (Equation 43) GUID-5B3FBFF7-3A16-4320-9175-EE3FE5081718 V1 EN Where current I is the one of the normalized currents I and I determined by the angle differences between the currents and their amplitudes. The currents I and I are the remaining two currents.
  • Page 432 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions relay from the corresponding windings does not change. When the phase shift setting between windings is 180.0 degrees, the phase currents from the other winding turns 180° in the protection relay. The transform is first applied to the set of 3 line currents on the winding 1 side of the power transformer, and then on the set of 3 line currents on the winding 2 side.
  • Page 433 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions A correct scaling is determined by the number of steps and the direction of the deviation from the nominal tap and the percentage change in the voltage resulting from a deviation of one tap step. The percentage value is set via the Step of tap setting. The operating range of the tap changer is defined by the Min winding tap and Max winding tap settings.
  • Page 434 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Second harmonic blocking Transformer-magnetizing inrush currents occur when the transformer is energized after a period of de-energization. The inrush current may be many times the rated current, and the half-life can be up to several seconds. To the differential protection relay, the inrush current represents a differential current that causes the protection relay to trip almost always when the transformer is connected to the network.
  • Page 435 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions the different waveform and the different rate of change of the normal inrush current and the inrush current containing the fault current. The algorithm does not eliminate the blocking at inrush currents, unless there is a fault in the protected area. The feature can be enabled and disabled through the Harmonic deblock 2.H setting.
  • Page 436 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions consecutive fulfillments of the condition. When the condition is not fulfilled, the counter is decreased (if >0). Waveform blocking The biased low stage can always be blocked with waveform blocking. It cannot be disabled with Restraint mode. This algorithm has two parts. The first part is intended for external faults while the second is intended for inrush situations.
  • Page 437 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Charact. (from Differential calculation) TRIP OPR_LS (from Differential calculation) BLOCK bias BLOCK_OPR_LS Slope section 2 End section 2 Low trip value BLKD2H Fault in protected area (from Differential calculation) BLKD2HPHAR_A (from Second harmonic blocking) BLKD2HPHAR_B (from Second harmonic blocking) BLKD5H...
  • Page 438 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The stage can be blocked internally by the second or the fifth harmonic restraint, or by special algorithms detecting the inrush and current transformer saturation at external faults. When the operation of the biased low stage is blocked by the second harmonic blocking functionality, the BLKD2H output is activated.
  • Page 439 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The Slope section 2 setting is determined correspondingly: Slope section 2 = Id2/Ib2 x 100 % (Equation 47) GUID-6E355F0D-D86F-4EC5-8B7B-78224862B137 V1 EN The second turning point End section 2 can be set in the range of 100 percent to 500 percent.
  • Page 440 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Slope section trip section Curve value 50 %Ir 50 % 100 %Ir 20 %Ir 30 % 150 %Ir 5 %Ir 10 % 500 %Ir Curve 1 Curve 2 ( Default settings ) Curve 3 GUID-8BDD4422-013A-4CE3-9282-8614296B4F45 V1 EN Figure 199: Setting range for Biased low stage...
  • Page 441 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions If the biasing current is small compared to differential current, or if the phase angle between the current of two windings with the highest phase current is close to zero (normally, the phase difference is 180 degrees) or the phase angle between the compared phase currents (in case of two winding transformer) is close to zero, a fault has occurred in the area protected by the differential protection.
  • Page 442: Ct Connections And Transformation Ratio Correction

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Fault in protected area TRIP (from Differential calculation) OPR_HS (from Differential calculation) BLOCK BLK_OPR_HS High trip value GUID-595F0C31-7DF0-4253-BEB9-094FC986141C V1 EN Figure 201: Operation logic of Instantaneous high stage External blocking functionality The 87T has three inputs for blocking. Blocking functionality Description When active (TRUE), the operation of the function is blocked, only...
  • Page 443 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions X120 1/5A 1/5A X120 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A X120 1/5A X120 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A GUID-CE87FD99-A5A4-4D0E-883F-4D434E4F21C9 V1 EN Figure 202: Connection of current transformers of Type 1 and example of currents during external fault 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 444: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions X120 1/5A 1/5A X120 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A X120 1/5A X120 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A 1/5A GUID-7E298CD4-05F7-4764-9408-E3DC37C6CBE6 V1 EN Figure 203: Connection of current transformers of Type 2 and example of currents during external fault In case of three-winding transformer, the above consideration applies between winding 1 and winding 2.
  • Page 445 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions differential protection relay, the protective zone does not include the bus work or cables between the circuit breaker and the power transformer. In some substations, there is a current differential protection for the busbar. Such a busbar protection includes the bus work or cables between the circuit breaker and the power transformer.
  • Page 446 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions the interposing CT, the accuracy limit factor must fulfill the same requirements as the main CTs. The interposing CT imposes an additional burden to the main CTs. 87T3 87T3 3dI>T 3dI>T Distance e.g. 500 m GUID-6C603D81-D4DB-416A-A0D8-43BB4267B98F V1 EN Figure 204: Differential protection of generator-transformer block and short cable or...
  • Page 447 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions In the normal two-winding transformer application with one set of three-phase currents on both sides of the transformer, the Current group 3 type setting must be set as "Not in use". 87T3 87T3 3dI>T 3dI>T 87T3 3dI>T...
  • Page 448 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-983C9055-4686-4D5F-960E-0270BA365017 V1 EN Figure 206: Example of two-winding power transformer differential protection The rated load of the transformer can be calculated. HV side: I = 25 MVA / (1.732 x 110 kV) = 131.2 A nT_Wnd1 LV side: I = 25 MVA / (1.732 x 21 kV) = 687.3 A...
  • Page 449 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Commissioning The settings for the connection group compensation (CT connection 1-2, Phase shift Wnd 1-2 and in case of three-winding transformer also CT connection 1-3 and Phase shift Wnd 1-3 settings) can be verified by monitoring the angle values (I_ANGL_A1_B1, I_ANGL_B1_C1, I_ANGL_C1_A1, I_ANGL_A2_B2, I_ANGL_B2_C2, I_ANGL_C2_A2, I_ANGL_A1_A2, I_ANGL_B1_B2 and I_ANGL_C1_C2 and in case of three-winding transformer also I_ANGL_A3_B3, I_ANGL_B3_C3,...
  • Page 450 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions If this is not the case, the phase order may be wrong or the polarity of one current transformer differs from the polarities of the other current transformers on the same side. If the angle values I_ANGL_A1_B1, I_ANGL_B1_C1 and I_ANGL_C1_A1 show -120 degrees, the phase order is wrong on winding 1, for example, the high-voltage side.
  • Page 451 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 341: Angle outputs when settings CT connection 1-2 and CT connection 1-3 match with the actual CT connections on winding 1, 2 and 3 but the phase order is wrong on winding 1 Angle output name Angle value Possible reason if not Ok...
  • Page 452: Recommendations For Current Transformers

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Angle output name Angle value Possible reason if not Ok I_ANGL_A1_A3 ±180 I_ANGL_B1_B3 ±180 I_ANGL_C1_C3 ±180 Table 343: Angle outputs when settings CT connection 1-2 and CT connection 1-3 match with the actual CT connections on winding 1, 2 and 3 but the phase B polarity is wrong compared to other phases on winding 2 Angle output name Angle value...
  • Page 453 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions of the phase displacement is 60 minutes. The limit of the composite error at the rated accuracy limit primary current is 5 percent. The approximate value of the accuracy limit factor F corresponding to the actual CT burden can be calculated on the basis of the rated accuracy limit factor F (ALF) at the rated burden, the rated burden S...
  • Page 454 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions -Tm / Tdc Fa > K I × × × (1 - e ) + 1) ω kmax (Equation 50) GUID-1343CD99-BC2C-497C-A3C8-FCBB7DAE1231 V1 EN the maximum through-going fault current (in p.u.) at which the protection is not allowed to operate kmax the primary DC time constant related to I kmax...
  • Page 455 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions -Tm / Tdc F > K × × × × (1 - e ) + 1) 40 ≈ ω kmax (Equation 51) GUID-683C906B-2772-46F3-8BF3-F333E0915A2E V1 EN 10 (p.u.) kmax 100 (ms) ω 100π (Hz) 10 (ms) Re-energizing against a fault occurring further down in the network.
  • Page 456: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Example 2 Assuming that the actions according to the current transformer with a higher nominal primary current I1 (but the same rated burden) is taken to improve the actual accuracy limit factor (F = 1000 A rated secondary current of the transformer = 1500 A rated primary current of the CT on the transformer secondary side...
  • Page 457: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Name Type Default Description I_C3 SIGNAL Current ID for getting current values for phase 3, tertiary side or LV restraint BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block BLK_OPR_LS BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks trip outputs from biased stage BLK_OPR_HS BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks trip outputs from instantaneous stage...
  • Page 458 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 347: 87T3 Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable/ Enable 5=disable Current group 3 type 1=Not in use 2=Winding 3 Type of the third set/group of current inputs 2=Winding 3 3=Wnd 1 restraint 4=Wnd 2 restraint...
  • Page 459: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.6.2.10 Monitored data Table 348: 87T3 Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description OPR_A BOOLEAN 0=False Trip phase A 1=True OPR_B BOOLEAN 0=False Trip phase B 1=True OPR_C BOOLEAN 0=False Trip phase C 1=True BLKD2H_A BOOLEAN...
  • Page 460 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description BLKD5HPHAR_B BOOLEAN 0=False 5th harmonic restraint 1=True blocking for PHAR LN, phase BLKD5HPHAR_C BOOLEAN 0=False 5th harmonic restraint 1=True blocking for PHAR LN, phase I_AMPL_A1 FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Connection group compensated primary current phase A I_AMPL_B1...
  • Page 461 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description I_5H_RAT_A FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Differential current fifth harmonic ratio, phase A I_5H_RAT_B FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Differential current fifth harmonic ratio, phase B I_5H_RAT_C FLOAT32 0.00...1.00 Differential current fifth harmonic ratio, phase C I_ANGL_A1_B1 FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00...
  • Page 462: Technical Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.6.2.11 Technical data Table 349: 87T3 technical data Parameter Accuracy/value Pickup accuracy Depending on the frequency of the current measured: f ±2 Hz ±3.0% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Minimum Typical Maximum 1)2) Pickup time...
  • Page 463: Operation Principle

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The fundamental components of the currents are used for calculating the residual current of the phase currents, the neutral current, differential currents and stabilizing currents. The operating characteristics are according to the definite time. 87LOZREF contains a blocking functionality.
  • Page 464 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions ID COSPHI Σ I Io − ) cos × ϕ (Equation 53) GUID-46782962-D465-47D2-8ECE-3FF0B87B324F V3 EN Residual current ΣI GUID-87E4DEDD-9288-41D9-B608-714CF3CC7A04 V1 EN Phase difference between the residual and neutral currents ϕ GUID-C4F98C50-7279-4DAA-8C77-5C761572F4B4 V1 EN Neutral current GUID-2D713C98-4F81-4DF4-8193-C47120A65489 V1 EN A ground fault occurring in the protected area, that is, between the phase CTs and the neutral connection CT, causes a differential current.
  • Page 465 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions ID_COSPHI/ In TRIPPING Trip value NON TRIPPING IB/In GUID-9D592151-7598-479B-9285-7FB7C09F0FAB-ANSI V1 EN Figure 210: Operating characteristics of the stabilized ground-fault protection function GUID-4BF3E289-E355-4C31-B87E-151DFDDCEBA8-ANSI V1 EN Figure 211: Setting range of the operating characteristics for the stabilized differential current principle of the ground-fault protection function The Trip value setting is used for defining the characteristics of the function.
  • Page 466 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions To calculate the directional differential current ID_COSPHI, the fundamental frequency amplitude of both the residual and neutral currents has to be above 4 percent of In. If neither or only one condition is fulfilled at a time, the cosφ term is forced to 1. After the conditions are fulfilled, both currents must stay above 2 percent of In to allow the continuous calculation of the cosφ...
  • Page 467: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions TRIP output is not activated. The activation of the output of the second harmonic blocking signal BLK2H deactivates the TRIP output. 4.6.3.5 Application A ground-fault protection using an overcurrent element does not adequately protect the transformer winding in general and the 87LOZREF winding in particular.
  • Page 468 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-4C9B4650-70D1-402E-8AF2-8392758D5B04-ANSI V1 EN Figure 212: Connection of the current transformers of Type 1. The connected phase currents and the neutral current have opposite directions at an external ground-fault situation. GUID-7D94D578-73E0-4A12-8450-7FB46DFA00F3-ANSI V1 EN Figure 213: Connection of the current transformers of Type 2.
  • Page 469 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions zone of protection a = 0 b = 0 b = 0 c = 0 For external fault Reference is Neutral Current Operate for Restrain for internal fault external fault GUID-FAC5E4AD-A4A7-4D39-9EAC-C380EA33CB78 V2 EN Figure 214: Current flow in all the CTs for an external fault 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 470 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions zone of protection a = 0 b = 0 c = 0 Ifault For internal fault Reference is Neutral Current Restrain for Operate for external fault internal fault GUID-D5D712D4-2291-4C49-93DE-363F9F10801C V2 EN Figure 215: Current flow in all the CTs for an internal fault 87LOZREF does not respond to phase-to-phase faults either, as in this case the fault current flows between the two line CTs and so the neutral CT does not experience this fault current.
  • Page 471: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Blocking the starting of the restricted ground-fault protection at the magnetizing inrush is based on the ratio of the second harmonic and the fundamental frequency amplitudes of the neutral current IG_2H / IG. Typically, the second harmonic content of the neutral current at the magnetizing inrush is higher than that of the phase currents.
  • Page 472: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.6.3.8 Monitored data Table 354: 87LOZREF Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of pickup time / trip time RES2H BOOLEAN 0=False 2nd harmonic restraint 1=True IDIFF FLOAT32 0.00...80.00 Differential current IBIAS FLOAT32...
  • Page 473: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number High-impedance differential protection HIPDIF dHi> 4.6.4.2 Function block TRIP TRIP TRIP BLOCK PICKUP BLOCK PICKUP BLOCK PICKUP GUID-936A0B51-A681-4814-A3C8-742DDC670FCF V1 EN Figure 216: Function block 4.6.4.3 Functionality...
  • Page 474 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Timer PICKUP Level detector TRIP Blocking BLOCK logic Timer PICKUP Level detector TRIP Blocking BLOCK logic Timer PICKUP Level detector TRIP Blocking BLOCK logic GUID-B91E3EF5-7AB5-4F2D-AC6E-5A39FF7BC7B6 V1 EN Figure 217: Functional module diagram The module diagram illustrates all the phases of the function. Functionality for phases A, B and C is identical.
  • Page 475: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operation timer resets and the PICKUP output is deactivated. Timer calculates the start duration PICKUP_DUR value, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time. The value is available in the Monitored data view.
  • Page 476 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-1AB5D686-3B9C-413F-9D0A-215BFCA224B4 V1 EN Figure 218: Phase-segregated bus differential protection based on high-impedance principle CT secondary winding resistances (R ) and connection wire resistances (R /2) are also shown in Figure 219. Figure 219 demonstrates a simplified circuit consisting only of one incoming and outgoing feeder.
  • Page 477 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-AE532349-F4F6-4FF9-8A98-0C862162E208 V1 EN Figure 219: Equivalent circuit when there is no fault or CT saturation When there is no fault, the CT secondary currents and their emf voltages, E and E , are opposite and the protection relay measuring branch has no voltage or current. If an in-zone fault occurs, the secondary currents have the same direction.
  • Page 478 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-CB3CACF7-A2D5-4D76-83B3-44F6AD6D2F9B V1 EN Figure 220: Equivalent circuit in case of in-zone fault Figure 221 shows CT saturation at a through-fault, that is, out-of-zone, situation. The magnetization impedance of a saturated CT is almost zero. The saturated CT winding can be presented as a short circuit.
  • Page 479 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Saturated U = I x (R ≈ 0 GUID-137DF2DA-9768-4430-8A8E-1986CA9EFD03 V1 EN Figure 221: Equivalent circuit in case of the CT saturation at through-fault The CT saturation happens most likely in the case of an in-zone fault. This is not a problem, because although the operation remains stable (non- operative) during the saturated parts of the CT secondary current waveform, the non-saturated part of the current waveform causes the...
  • Page 480 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Busbar protection scheme The basic concept for any bus differential protection relay is a direct use of Kirchoff’s first law that the sum of all currents connected to one differential protection zone is zero. If the sum is not zero, an internal fault has occurred.
  • Page 481 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-C5514DFD-9FE8-4BF7-93D8-14186867D0F8 V1 EN Figure 223: Phase-segregated single busbar protection employing high-impedance differential protection Figure shows an example for a system consisting of two busbar section coupled with a bus coupler. Each busbar section consists of two feeders and both sections are provided with a separate differential protection to form different zones.
  • Page 482 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions considered in calculating differential current. During normal condition, the summation of the current on each bus section is zero. However, if there is a fault in any busbar section, the difference current is no longer zero and the protection operates. Zone A Zone B Bus coupler...
  • Page 483 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Main Bus Transfer Bus Stabilizing resistor R Differential protection ..(87A, 87B, 87C) Incoming / Outgoing Feeder GUID-A04D625C-62E6-47A1-9306-B365FF784AAD V1 EN Figure 225: Differential protection on Bus transfer scheme (Single phase representation) Figure 226shows an arrangement of double busbar scheme with two feeders and a bus...
  • Page 484: Current Transformer Requirements For Differential Protection

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Main Bus Reserve Bus Main Bus Reserve Bus Common Voltage dependent Voltage dependent resistor R resistor R Stabilizing Stabilizing Reserve bus Main bus resistor R resistor R protection protection 3x required for three 3x required for three phases phases GUID-247721CC-90C6-448F-9C30-F142714361D5 V1 EN...
  • Page 485 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-125D0534-32F1-4E09-8A34-CBF36D547735 V1 EN Figure 227: High-impedance busbar differential protection with different CT burden value on each feeder First, the stabilizing voltage, that is, the voltage appearing across the measuring branch during the out-of-zone fault, is calculated assuming that one of the CTs connected in parallel is fully saturated.
  • Page 486 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions the resistance (maximum of R ) of the CT secondary circuit in ohms The current transformers must be able to force enough current to operate the protection relay through the differential circuit during a fault condition inside the protection zone. To ensure this, the knee point voltage U must be at least two times higher than the stabilizing voltage U...
  • Page 487 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions × (Equation 58) GUID-8C4CAB10-997F-4C14-9F30-5DB6F4CEC54E V1 EN The actual sensitivity of the protection is affected by the protection relay setting, the magnetizing currents of the CTs connected in parallel and the shunting effect of the voltage-dependent resistor (VDR).
  • Page 488 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions   × × ×       (Equation 60) GUID-AFA68232-5288-4220-845E-40347B691E29 V2 EN the rated accuracy limit factor corresponding to the rated burden S the rated secondary current of the CT the secondary internal resistance of the CT the volt-amp rating of the CT The formulas are based on selecting the CTs according to...
  • Page 489: Example Calculations For Busbar High-Impedance Differential Protection

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions û − (Equation 62) GUID-0FBE4CDF-8A7C-4574-8325-C61E61E0C55C V1 EN the knee point voltage of the CT The VDR is recommended when the peak voltage û ≥ 2kV, which is the insulation level for which the protection relay is tested. The maximum fault current in case of a fault inside the zone is considered to be 12.6 kA in primary, CT is of 1250/5 A (ratio n = 240), knee point voltage is 81 V and the stabilizing resistor is 330 Ohms.
  • Page 490 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 2000/1A 2000/1A Bus coupler 2000/1A 2…..7 2000/1A 2000/1A Stabilizing Stabilizing resistor R resistor R Differential protection Differential protection (87A, 87B, 87C) for (87A, 87B, 87C) for Zone A Zone B GUID-97462931-644F-4EFD-8C9A-AF61A3C870B8 V1 EN Figure 228: Example for busbar differential protection Bus data: 20 kV...
  • Page 491 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The stabilizing voltage is calculated using the formula: 25000 15 75 Ω Ω ≈ 209 37 2000 (Equation 65) GUID-8A00B448-8331-4455-8CDC-35E4E746C5C0 V1 EN In this case, the requirement for the current transformer knee point voltage is fulfilled because V >...
  • Page 492: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions ≥ ≈ 5900 Ω (Equation 72) GUID-28EF2E18-E1A9-4332-B39B-56D3C1141F70 V1 EN Based onEquation 73 Equation 74, the need for voltage-dependent resistor is checked. 25000 Ω Ω Ω ≈ 5900 15 75 1 00 74 0 2000 (Equation 73) GUID-385AE8B6-691A-42D0-8DAA-069769B90449 V1 EN ˘...
  • Page 493: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.6.4.9 Settings Table 358: 87 Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Trip value 1...200 Trip value, percentage of the nominal current Minimum trip time 20...300000 Minimum trip time Table 359: 87 Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
  • Page 494: Impedance Protection

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Characteristic Value Reset ratio Typically 0.96 Retardation time <35 ms Trip time accuracy in definite time mode ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms 1) Measurement mode = default (depends on stage), current before fault = 0.0 × I = 50 Hz, fault current with nominal frequency injected from random phase angle, results based on statistical distribution of 1000 measurements...
  • Page 495: Function Block

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.7.1.2 Function block GUID-E50B9C93-A9EF-421B-8B8D-581C0AC67E89-ANSI V1 EN Figure 229: Function block 4.7.1.3 Functionality The phase step distance protection function 21P can be used for the short circuit protection of distribution networks. 21P operates selectively for two-phase and three-phase short circuits.
  • Page 496: Operation Principle

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.7.1.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “Enable” and “Disable”. Additionally, each zone can be "On" or "Off" individually with the help of the Operation Znx setting. When selected "On", the particular zone is enabled, and respectively "Off"...
  • Page 497 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The activation of the PICKUP_GFC output indicates a two-phase or three-phase short circuit. The identification of the faulty phases is indicated in output PICKUPS_GFC. Depending on the faulty phases, the corresponding impedance-measuring elements in zones are released and indicated in the RELEASE_PP output.
  • Page 498 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Angle load area GFC Angle load area GFC Angle load area GFC Angle load area GFC Ris reach load GFC Ris reach load GFC GUID-57F6CB20-00B5-467E-A59C-8A6B36849D00 V1 EN Figure 231: Circular (mho) characteristics with load discrimination logic enabled Before releasing the phase-to-phase or three-phase fault measuring impedance elements of zones, the measured load impedance is evaluated with the load discrimination logic.
  • Page 499 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions impedance measuring elements provide basic protection against the phase-to-phase short circuit fault in all networks, regardless of the position of the neutral point. The reach of phase-to-phase measuring elements is based on the loop impedance. The reach is calculated using the equation: (Equation 80) GUID-CF809595-9ACD-4F57-84B1-2E3083BF6A50 V1 EN...
  • Page 500 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions which increases the accuracy by reducing the influence of the line parameter asymmetry. This is advantageous especially in case of non-transposed lines. The reach of three-phase measuring element is based on the loop impedance. The reach is calculated using the equation: (Equation 81) GUID-D42809E6-F16F-4C92-B8F4-8A0DAA47EE75 V1 EN...
  • Page 501 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Distance characteristics zone definer This module defines the protection zone characteristics. There are totally five independently configurable mho zones, whose line reach, angle and directionality can be set individually for each zone. Each zone can be enabled or disabled individually with the Operation Znx setting, where x = 1...5.
  • Page 502 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Defining mho (circular) zone characteristics The directionality of a particular zone is defined with the Directional mode Znx (x = 1… 5) setting. When selected "Forward", the zone trips on faults in forward direction and respectively "Reverse"...
  • Page 503: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions reach zone x angle zone x 1 source GUID-078EC6D0-5760-4D6D-AE60-9FCB97535BE1 V1 EN Figure 236: Mho (circular) operating characteristics with cross polarization In the case of positive-sequence polarization, the polarization voltage is the positive- sequence voltage. The voltage phase angle is rotated to match the original fault loop voltage.
  • Page 504 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions overcurrent-based schemes. In these kinds of networks, 21P is used to provide a fast and selective protection for overhead lines and power cables. It can also be applied for radial feeders to increase the sensitivity of the protection, especially if the short circuit power of the source is low or if it is changing due to network operation.
  • Page 505: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.7.1.6 Signals Table 364: 21P Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current SIGNAL Positive sequence current SIGNAL Negative sequence current V_A_AB SIGNAL Phase-to-ground voltage A or phase-to-phase voltage V_B_BC SIGNAL Phase-to-ground voltage B or phase-to-phase voltage...
  • Page 506: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.7.1.7 Settings Table 366: 21P Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pol quantity -2=Pos. seq. volt. 5=Cross pol Mho polarization method for zones 5=Cross pol Voltage Mem time 0...3000 Voltage memory time Ph Str A Ph Sel GFC 0.10...10.00 0.01...
  • Page 507 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Min Ng Seq A Zn3 0.10...10.00 0.01 0.10 Minimum Neg. seq. current for PP-loop, Zone 3 Directional mode Zn4 2=Forward 2=Forward Directional mode, Zone Z4 3=Reverse Z1 reach zone 4 0.10...1000.00 0.01 56.57...
  • Page 508: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.7.1.8 Monitored data Table 368: 21P Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description RELEASE_PP Enum 0=No fault Release signals for PP/3P 4=BC Fault loops, GFC 5=CA Fault 6=ABC Fault 7=AB Fault STARTS_GFC Enum 0=No fault Phase pickup signals packed, 4=AB Fault...
  • Page 509: Out Of Step 78

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.7.2 Out of step 78 4.7.2.1 Identification This function is available in REM620 Ver.2.1 only. Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Out of step protection OOSRPSB φ> 4.7.2.2 Function block TRIP SWING...
  • Page 510: Operation Principle

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.7.2.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "Enable" and "Disable". The operation of 78 can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
  • Page 511 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions blinder R and Outer blinder R intercepting at R-axis. The blinders are at the same angle as the Impedance angle. The second blinder of each outer and inner pair is automatically made symmetrical with the origin of the R-X plane. For a correct operation, it is required that the setting for Inner blinder R is less than the setting for Outer blinder R.
  • Page 512 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Zone 2 Zone 1 Zone 3 GUID-5C2AD9EC-F994-4DB0-B061-6B1B6A10D891 V1 EN Figure 242: Defined zones Out of step condition is a symmetrical event, so out of step detection is enabled only if the negative-sequence current is below the Max Ng Seq current setting. The impedance is continuously monitored for detecting an out of step condition.
  • Page 513 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions If “Way out” option is selected, after detecting an OSB condition, the function further checks if impedance exits the outer blinder. On exiting the outer blinder, Way out timer defined by Trip delay time setting is triggered and the respective zone slip counter is incremented after the set Trip delay time has elapsed.
  • Page 514 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions The swing angles, δ and δ , are estimated from the measured impedance when crossing the blinders. It is the difference in these quantities that is important for determining the slip frequency. If the “Adaptive” option is selected, after detecting an OSB condition, the function further examines the slip frequency f , V dip time setting, and swing angle at the outer blinder slip...
  • Page 515: Application

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions signal is deactivated, the function remains blocked (outputs disabled) for additional time duration as set through the setting Disable time. Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System /Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode.
  • Page 516: Signals

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-87E27B8C-02D6-4970-AF78-55E6ACB630F0 V1 EN Figure 243: Example of out of step detection The shaded region indicates a fault zone in a distance protection function. For curve A, the impedance moves into the out of step zone and leaves slowly, indicating the occurrence of a swing that quickly stabilizes.
  • Page 517: Settings

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 371: 78 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN OOS Trip SWING_TR BOOLEAN Swing trip output SWING BOOLEAN Swing output BOOLEAN OOS block zone 1 OSB_Z2 BOOLEAN OOS block zone 2 4.7.2.7 Settings Table 372: 78 Group settings Parameter...
  • Page 518: Monitored Data

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 373: 78 Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 5=disable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Min Ps Seq current 0.01...10.00 0.01 0.10 Minimum positive sequence current for operation Max Ng Seq current 0.01...10.00 0.01...
  • Page 519: Three-Phase Underexcitation Protection 40

    Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.7.3 Three-phase underexcitation protection 40 4.7.3.1 Identification This function is available in REM620 Ver.2.1 only. Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase underexcitation protection UEXPDIS X< 4.7.3.2 Function block TRIP PICKUP EXT_LOS_DET...
  • Page 520 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.7.3.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are "Enable" and "Disable". The operation of the three-phase underexcitation protection function can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Timer TRIP Impedance...
  • Page 521 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Measurement mode Phase Sel for Z Clc Voltages and currents 3Phase-earth U_A, U_B, U_C, I_A, I_B, I_C 3Phase-phase U_AB, U_BC, U_CA, I_A, I_B, I_C Pos seqn { U_A,U_B,U_C } or { U_AB,U_BC,U_CA } and I_A, I_B, I_C If all three phase voltages and phase currents are fed to the protection relay, the positive-sequence alternative is recommended.
  • Page 522 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions GUID-A023B281-CA68-4A0C-8E90-9075DF588504 V1 EN Figure 246: Operating region of the impedance mho circle A fault in Automatic Voltage Regulator (AVR) or in the excitation system may cause a total loss of excitation. A short circuit on the slip rings reduces the excitation voltage to zero.
  • Page 523 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions offset-mho operating characteristics before the module operates, the reset timer is activated. If the reset timer reaches the value set by Reset delay time, the operating timer resets and the PICKUP output is deactivated. The Timer calculates the start duration value PICKUP_DUR, which indicates the percentage ratio of the start situation and the set operating time (DT).
  • Page 524 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Q (Reactive power) p.u. Motor Generator Over-Excitation P (Active power) p.u. Under-Excitation =0.2 =0.0 Where, AB= Field current limit BC= Stator current limit CD= End region heating limit of stator. Due to leakage flux BH= Possible active power limit due to turbine output power limitation EF= Steady -state limit without AVR GUID-FD5EDD69-0D03-4A97-A1AB-46C755F531A5 V2 EN...
  • Page 525 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Table 377: Parameters of the circle Setting values Description Offset Distance of the top of the circle from the R-axis. This is usually set equal to - x ’/2, where x ’ is the transient reactance of the machine. The sign of the setting value determines the top of the circle regarding the R-axis.
  • Page 526 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions X (Reactance) R (Resistance) Relay operation characteristics a) Z locus in under excitation for heavily loaded machine b) Z locus in under excitation for lightly loaded machine c) Z locus for a fault in the network GUID-C7940DC8-04A8-4FED-B089-DAA9B21D50DB V2 EN Figure 248: Typical impedance locus in underexcitation: a) heavy load b) light load c)
  • Page 527 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode BLK_TRIP BOOLEAN FALSE Block signal for operate output BLK_PICKUP BOOLEAN FALSE Block signal for start FR_TIMER BOOLEAN FALSE Freeze signal for timer Table 379: 40 Output signals Name...
  • Page 528 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions 4.7.3.9 Monitored data Table 382: 40 Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PICKUP_DUR FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Ratio of pickup time / trip time (in %) Z_AMPL_A FLOAT32 0.00...200.00 Impedance amplitude phase A Z_ANGLE_A FLOAT32 -180.00...180.00 Impedance angle phase A...
  • Page 529 Section 4 1MAC504801-IB E Protection functions Characteristic Value Reset ratio Typically 1.04 Retardation time Total retardation time when the impedance returns from the operating circle <40 ms Operate time accuracy ±1.0% of the set value or ±20 ms 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 531 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions Section 5 Protection-related functions Three-phase inrush detector INR 5.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Three-phase inrush detector INRPHAR 3I2f> 5.1.2 Function block A070377-ANSI V1 EN Figure 249: Function block 5.1.3 Functionality...
  • Page 532 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions 5.1.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “Enable” and “Disable”. The operation of an inrush current detection function can be described using a module diagram.
  • Page 533 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions within the trip time up counting, the reset timer is activated. If the drop-off time exceeds Reset delay time, the trip timer is reset. The BLOCK input can be controlled with a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the relay program.
  • Page 534 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions A070695 V2 EN Figure 251: Inrush current in transformer 5.1.6 Signals Table 384: INR Input signals Name Type Default Description I_2H_A SIGNAL Second harmonic phase A current I_1H_A SIGNAL Fundamental frequency phase A current I_2H_B SIGNAL Second harmonic phase B current...
  • Page 535 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions 5.1.7 Settings Table 386: INR Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup value 5...100 Ratio of the 2. to the 1. harmonic leading to restraint Trip delay time 20...60000 Trip delay time Table 387: INR Non group settings Parameter...
  • Page 536 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions Circuit breaker failure protection 50BF 5.2.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Circuit breaker failure protection CCBRBRF 3I>/Io>BF 50BF 5.2.2 Function block GUID-12D6BD6F-2B26-453D-B62F-FC134EC98931 V3 EN Figure 252: Function block 5.2.3 Functionality...
  • Page 537 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions The operation of the breaker failure protection can be described using a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections. Also further information on the retrip and backup trip logics is given in sub-module diagrams. A070445-ANSI V1 EN Figure 253: Functional module diagram.
  • Page 538 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions Function resetting is prohibited in 150 ms after TRRET or TRBU is set. The 150 ms time elapse is provided to prevent malfunctioning due to oscillation in the starting signal. In case the setting Start latching mode is set to "Level sensitive", the CCBRBRF is reset immediately after the PICKUP signal is deactivated.
  • Page 539 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions From Level detector 2 CB failu re trip mode “2 out of 4" From Level detector 1 From Level detector 2 CB failu re trip mode “1 out of 4" From Level detector 1 CB failu re mo de ”Cu rrent”...
  • Page 540 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions maximum opening time for the circuit breaker cbopen maximum time for the breaker failure protection to detect the correct breaker function (the current BFP_reset criteria reset) safety margin margin It is often required that the total fault clearance time is less than the given critical time. This time often depends on the ability to maintain transient stability in case of a fault close to a power plant.
  • Page 541 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions • The retrip logic is inactive if the CB fail retrip mode setting is set to "Disabled". • If CB fail retrip mode is set to the "Current check" mode, the activation of the retrip output TRRET depends on the CB failure mode setting.
  • Page 542 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions module (rising edge of the PICKUP input detected), and simultaneously CB_FAULT_AL is active. The operation of the backup logic depends on the CB failure mode setting. • If the CB failure mode is set to "Current", the activation of TRBU depends on the CB failure trip mode setting.
  • Page 543 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions BLOCK CB_FAULT_AL From Timer 3 Enable timer From Start logic Timer 2 elapsed TRBU From Timer 2 From level detector 1 CB failure trip mode ”2 out of 4" 51N/G From level detector 2 CB failure trip mode ”1 out of 3"...
  • Page 544 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions The function can also be used to avoid backup tripping of several breakers in case mistakes occur during protection relay maintenance and tests. 50BF is initiated by operating different protection functions or digital logics inside the protection relay.
  • Page 545 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions 5.2.6 Signals Table 390: 50BF Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current SIGNAL Ground current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block CBFP operation PICKUP BOOLEAN 0=False CBFP pickup command POSCLOSE...
  • Page 546 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description CB fault delay 0...60000 5000 Circuit breaker faulty delay Measurement mode 2=DFT 2=DFT Phase current measurement mode of function 3=Peak-to-Peak Trip pulse time 0...60000 Pulse length of retrip and backup trip outputs 5.2.8 Monitored data Table 393:...
  • Page 547 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions 5.3.2 Function block A071286-ANSI V2 EN Figure 259: Function block 5.3.3 Functionality The master trip function 86/94 is intended to be used as a trip command collector and handler after the protection functions. The features of this function influence the trip signal behavior of the circuit breaker.
  • Page 548 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions input TRIP, through which all trip output signals are routed from the protection functions within the protection relay, or from external protection functions via one or more of the protection relay's binary inputs. The function has a single trip output TRIP for connecting the function to one or more of the protection relay's binary outputs, and also to other functions within the protection relay requiring this signal.
  • Page 549 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions MASTER TRIP 1 LOGIC X100 Breaker 86/94-1 51P Trip Open 50P-1 Trip TRPPTRC1 Signal to 50P-2 Trip BLOCK TRIP 50P-3 Trip TRIP CL_LKOUT Trip Coil 1 51LT Trip RST_LKOUT TCM-1 46-1 Trip With lock-out mode selection 46-2 Trip 51G Trip...
  • Page 550 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions 5.3.7 Settings Table 398: 86/94 Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Trip pulse time 20...60000 Minimum duration of trip output signal Trip output mode 1=Non-latched 1=Non-latched Select the operation mode for trip output...
  • Page 551 ABB has developed a patented technology (US Patent 7,069,116 B2 June 27, 2006, US Patent 7,085,659 B2 August 1, 2006) to detect a high-impedance fault.
  • Page 552 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions GUID-91FFCBAB-470F-43DD-AC86-E673BAACCBA6 V1 EN Figure 263: Electrical power system equipped with HIZ Power system signals are acquired, filtered and then processed by individual high- impedance fault detection algorithm. The results of these individual algorithms are further processed by a decision logic to provide the detection decision.
  • Page 553 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions observations in the laboratory, field testing and what traditionally represents an accurate depiction of a non-stationary signal with a time-dependent spectrum. GUID-61D297F5-783F-4CF2-BD16-18CE537C9E95-ANSI V1 EN GUID-B9AC5923-6A67-431B-A785-171FD132E1A6-ANSI V1 EN Figure 265: Validation of HIZ on gravel Figure 266: Validation of HIZ on concrete...
  • Page 554 High-impedance fault (HIZ) detection requires a different approach than that for conventional low-impedance faults. Reliable detection of HIZ provides safety to humans and animals. HIZ detection can also prevent fire and minimize property damage. ABB has developed innovative technology for high-impedance fault detection with over seven years of research resulting in many successful field tests.
  • Page 555 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions 5.4.8 Monitored data Table 404: HIZ Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Position Enum 0=intermediate Position 1=open 2=closed 3=faulty Enum 1=Enabled Status 2=blocked 3=test 4=test/blocked 5=Disabled Arc protection AFD 5.5.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2...
  • Page 556 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions The function contains a blocking functionality. Blocking deactivates all outputs and resets timers. 5.5.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “Enable” and “Disable”. The operation of arc protection can be described by using a module diagram.
  • Page 557 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions activated, the operation of the function is based on light information only. When the OPR_MODE input is deactivated, the operation of the function is based on both light and current information. When the required criteria are met, the drop-off timer is activated. Drop-off timer Once activated, the drop-off timer remains active until the input is deactivated or at least during the drop-off time.
  • Page 558 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions The light signal output from an arc protection stage ARC_FLT_DET is activated immediately in the detection of light in all situations. A station-wide arc protection is realized by routing the light signal output to an output contact connected to a binary input of another relay, or by routing the light signal output through the communication to an input of another relay.
  • Page 559 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions A040362-ANSI V1 EN Figure 271: Arc protection with one protection relay Arc protection with several protection relays When using several protection relays, the protection relay protecting the outgoing feeder trips the circuit breaker of the outgoing feeder when detecting an arc at the cable terminations.
  • Page 560 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions outgoing feeders, which in turn results in tripping of all circuit breakers of the outgoing feeders. For maximum safety, the protection relays can be configured to trip all the circuit breakers regardless of where the arc is detected. 52-1 IA,IB,IC,IG 52-2...
  • Page 561 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions 52-1 IA,IB,IC TRIP3 HSO2 HSO1 52-2 52-3 52-4 52-5 52-6 IA,IB,IC,IG IA,IB,IC,IG IA,IB,IC,IG IA,IB,IC,IG GUID-522A8AC7-511C-4613-83F8-DB6E83A12FD2 V1 EN Figure 273: Arc protection with several protection relays and a separate arc protection system 5.5.6 Signals Table 405: AFD Input signals Name Type...
  • Page 562 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions Table 406: AFD Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip ARC_FLT_DET BOOLEAN Fault arc detected=light signal output 5.5.7 Settings Table 407: AFD Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Phase pickup value 0.50...40.00 0.01 2.50...
  • Page 563 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions RTD based thermal protection 38 5.6.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number RTD based thermal protection MAPGAPC ThA> ThB> 5.6.2 Function block GUID-89CECF30-A255-4DCA-B5FD-3F3FCB183ACD V3 EN Figure 274: Function block 5.6.3 Functionality...
  • Page 564 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions GUID-B9FE9FD4-3C86-4B1B-A377-8056B82639D3 V1 EN Figure 275: Functional module diagram Level detector The level detector compares AI_VALUE to the Start value setting. The Operation mode setting defines the direction of the level detector. Table 411: Operation mode types Operation Mode Description "Under"...
  • Page 565 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions Blocking logic There are three operation modes in the blocking function. The operation modes are controlled by the BLOCK input and the global setting in Configuration/System/Blocking mode which selects the blocking mode. The BLOCK input can be controlled by a binary input, a horizontal communication input or an internal signal of the protection relay's program.
  • Page 566 Section 5 1MAC504801-IB E Protection-related functions Table 413: 38 Output signals Name Type Description TRIP BOOLEAN Trip PICKUP BOOLEAN Pickup 5.6.7 Settings Table 414: 38 Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pickup value -10000.0...10000.0 Pickup value Pickup value Add -100.0...100.0 Pickup value Add Trip delay time...
  • Page 567 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions Section 6 Supervision functions Circuit-breaker condition monitoring 52CM 6.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR CBCM 52CM 6.1.2 Function block A070795-ANSI V3 EN Figure 276: Function block 6.1.3...
  • Page 568 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions The function contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block the function outputs, if desired. 6.1.4 Operation principle The circuit breaker condition monitoring function includes different metering and monitoring sub-functions. The functions can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting.
  • Page 569 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions A071103 V3 EN Figure 277: Functional module diagram 6.1.4.1 Circuit breaker status The Circuit breaker status sub-function monitors the position of the circuit breaker, that is, whether the breaker is in open, closed or invalid position. The operation of the breaker status monitoring can be described by using a module diagram.
  • Page 570 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions A071104 V3 EN Figure 278: Functional module diagram for monitoring circuit breaker status Phase current check This module compares the three phase currents to the setting Acc stop current. If the current in a phase exceeds the set level, information about the phase is reported to the contact position indicator module.
  • Page 571 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions A071105 V2 EN Figure 279: Functional module diagram for calculating inactive days and alarm for circuit breaker operation monitoring Inactivity timer The module calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained inactive, that is, has stayed in the same open or closed state.
  • Page 572 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions measured between the opening of the POSOPEN auxiliary contact and the closing of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact. A071107 V1 EN Figure 281: Travel time calculation There is a time difference t between the start of the main contact opening and the opening of the POSCLOSE auxiliary contact.
  • Page 573 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.1.4.4 Operation counter The operation counter subfunction calculates the number of breaker operation cycles. The opening and closing operations are both included in one operation cycle. The operation counter value is updated after each opening operation. The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram.
  • Page 574 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions A071109 V2 EN Figure 283: Functional module diagram for calculating accumulative energy and alarm Accumulated energy calculator This module calculates the accumulated energy I t [(kA) s]. The factor y is set with the Current exponent setting.
  • Page 575 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions Alarm limit check The IPOW_ALM alarm is activated when the accumulated energy exceeds the value set with the Alm Acc currents Pwr threshold setting. However, when the energy exceeds the limit value set with the LO Acc currents Pwr threshold setting, the IPOW_LO output is activated.
  • Page 576 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions Clearing CB wear values also resets the operation counter. Alarm limit check When the remaining life of any phase drops below the Life alarm level threshold setting, the corresponding circuit breaker life alarm CB_LIFE_ALM is activated. It is possible to deactivate the CB_LIFE_ALM alarm signal by activating the binary input BLOCK.
  • Page 577 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions It is possible to block the SPR_CHR_ALM alarm signal by activating the BLOCK binary input. 6.1.4.8 Gas pressure supervision The gas pressure supervision subfunction monitors the gas pressure inside the arc chamber. The operation of the subfunction can be described with a module diagram. All the modules in the diagram are explained in the next sections.
  • Page 578 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions Circuit breaker operation monitoring The purpose of the circuit breaker operation monitoring is to indicate that the circuit breaker has not been operated for a long time. The function calculates the number of days the circuit breaker has remained inactive, that is, has stayed in the same open or closed state.
  • Page 579 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions A071114 V3 EN Figure 288: Trip Curves for a typical 12 kV, 630 A, 16 kA vacuum interrupter the number of closing-opening operations allowed for the circuit breaker the current at the time of tripping of the circuit breaker Calculation of Directional Coef The directional coefficient is calculated according to the formula: 620 series ANSI...
  • Page 580 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions       = − . 2 2609 Directional Coef       (Equation 88) A070794 V2 EN Rated operating current = 630 A Rated fault current = 16 kA Op number rated = 30000 Op number fault = 20 Calculation for estimating the remaining life...
  • Page 581 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions Name Type Default Description POSOPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O POSCLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for closeposition of apparatus from I/O PRES_ALM_IN BOOLEAN 0=False Binary pressure alarm input PRES_LO_IN BOOLEAN 0=False Binary pressure input for lockout indication SPR_CHR_ST...
  • Page 582 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.1.7 Settings Table 420: 52CM Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Acc stop current 5.00...500.00 0.01 10.00 RMS current setting below which engy acm stops Open alarm time 0...200...
  • Page 583 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.1.8 Monitored data Table 421: 52CM Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description T_TRV_OP FLOAT32 0...60000 Travel time of the CB during opening operation T_TRV_CL FLOAT32 0...60000 Travel time of the CB during closing operation T_SPR_CHR FLOAT32...
  • Page 584 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions Trip circuit supervision TCM 6.2.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Trip circuit supervision TCSSCBR 6.2.2 Function block A070788-ANSI V1 EN Figure 289: Function block 6.2.3 Functionality The trip circuit supervision function TCM is designed for supervision of control circuits.
  • Page 585 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions A070785-ANSI V1 EN Figure 290: Functional module diagram TCM status This module receives the trip circuit status from the hardware. A detected failure in the trip circuit activates the timer. Timer Once activated, the timer runs until the set value Trip delay time is elapsed. The time characteristic is according to DT.
  • Page 586 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions A051097-ANSI V2 EN Figure 291: Operating principle of the trip-circuit supervision with an external resistor. The TCM blocking switch is not required since the external resistor is used. If TCM is required only in a closed position, the external shunt resistance can be omitted. When the circuit breaker is in the open position, the TCM sees the situation as a faulty circuit.
  • Page 587 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions A051906-ANSI V2 EN Figure 292: Operating principle of the trip-circuit supervision without an external resistor. The circuit breaker open indication is set to block TCM when the circuit breaker is open. Trip circuit supervision and other trip contacts It is typical that the trip circuit contains more than one trip contact in parallel, for example in transformer feeders where the trip of a Buchholz relay is connected in parallel with the feeder terminal and other relays involved.
  • Page 588 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions A070968-ANSI V1 EN Figure 293: Constant test current flow in parallel trip contacts and trip circuit supervision In case of parallel trip contacts, the recommended way to do the wiring is that the TCM test current flows through all wires and joints.
  • Page 589 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions A070970-ANSI V1 EN Figure 294: Improved connection for parallel trip contacts where the test current flows through all wires and joints Several trip circuit supervision functions parallel in circuit Not only the trip circuit often have parallel trip contacts, it is also possible that the circuit has multiple TCM circuits in parallel.
  • Page 590 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions destroyed since the contact is obliged to disconnect high level of electromagnetic energy accumulated in the trip coil. An auxiliary relay can be used between the protection relay trip contact and the circuit breaker coil. This way the breaking capacity question is solved, but the TCM circuit in the protection relay monitors the healthy auxiliary relay coil, not the circuit breaker coil.
  • Page 591 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions because of the voltage drop in the R and operating coil or even voltage drop of the feeding auxiliary voltage system which can cause too low voltage values over the TCM contact. In this case, erroneous alarming can occur. At lower (<48 V DC) auxiliary circuit operating voltages, it is recommended to use the circuit breaker position to block unintentional operation of TCM.
  • Page 592 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions A070972-ANSI V1 EN Figure 296: Incorrect connection of trip-circuit supervision A connection of three protection relays with a double pole trip circuit is shown in the following figure. Only the protection relay R3 has an internal TCM circuit. In order to test the operation of the protection relay R2, but not to trip the circuit breaker, the upper trip contact of the protection relay R2 is disconnected, as shown in the figure, while the lower contact is still connected.
  • Page 593 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions A070974-ANSI V1 EN Figure 297: Incorrect testing of protection relays 6.2.6 Signals Table 424: TCM Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block input status Table 425: TCM Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN...
  • Page 594 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.2.7 Settings Table 426: TCM Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Trip delay time 20...300000 3000 Trip delay time Reset delay time 20...60000 1000 Reset delay time...
  • Page 595 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.3.3 Functionality The current circuit supervision function CCM is used for monitoring current transformers. CCM calculates internally the sum of phase currents (I_A, I_B and I_C) and compares the sum against the measured single reference current (I_REF). The reference current must originate from other three-phase CT cores than the phase currents (I_A, I_B and I_C) and it is to be externally summated, that is, outside the protection relay.
  • Page 596 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions GUID-D083BF22-574C-4603-971F-5F4371632A28 V1 EN Figure 300: CCM operating characteristics When the differential current I_DIFF is in the operating region, the FAIL output is activated. The function is internally blocked if any phase current is higher than the set Max trip current.
  • Page 597 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions Timer The timer is activated with the FAIL signal. The ALARM output is activated after a fixed 200 ms delay. FAIL needs to be active during the delay. When the internal blocking is activated, the FAIL output is deactivated immediately. The ALARM output is deactivated after a fixed 3 s delay, and the FAIL is deactivated.
  • Page 598 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions when unbalance occurs in the phase currents even if there was nothing wrong with the measurement circuit. Reference current measured with core-balanced current transformer CCM compares the sum of phase currents to the current measured with the core-balanced FAIL ALARM I_REF...
  • Page 599 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions FAIL ALARM I_REF I_REF BLOCK Other protection devices GUID-8DC3B17A-13FE-4E38-85C6-A228BC03206B-ANSI V2 EN Figure 302: Connection diagram for current circuit supervision with two sets of three- phase current transformer protection cores When using the measurement core for reference current measurement, it should be noted that the saturation level of the measurement core is much lower than with the protection core.
  • Page 600 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions FAIL ALARM I_REF I_REF BLOCK Measurement device GUID-C5A6BB27-36F9-4652-A5E4-E3D32CFEA77B-ANSI V2 EN Figure 303: Connection diagram for current circuit supervision with two sets of three- phase current transformer cores (protection and measurement) Example of incorrect connection The currents must be measured with two independent cores, that is, the phase currents must be measured with a different core than the reference current.
  • Page 601 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions FAIL ALARM I_REF I_REF BLOCK GUID-BBF3E23F-7CE4-43A3-8986-5AACA0433235-ANSI V2 EN Figure 304: Example of incorrect reference current connection 6.3.6 Signals Table 428: CCM Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current I_REF...
  • Page 602 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.3.7 Settings Table 430: CCM Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Enable / Disable 5=disable Pickup value 0.05...0.20 0.01 0.05 Minimum trip current differential level Max alarm current 1.00...5.00 0.01 1.50...
  • Page 603 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.4.2 Function block GUID-6EDF2732-697A-4770-AF30-A957E20E7054-ANSI V1 EN Figure 305: Function block 6.4.3 Functionality The CT secondary circuit supervision function MCS 3I, I2 is used for monitoring the current transformer secondary circuit where a separate reference current transformer input for comparison is not available or where a separate voltage channel for calculating or measuring the zero-sequence voltage is not available.
  • Page 604 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions GUID-813445E7-91CA-4F59-B12A-48B682686DED V2 EN Figure 306: Functional module diagram No-load detection No-load detection module detects the loading condition. If all the three-phase currents of any two sets of current transformer are zero, the protected equipment is considered to be in the no-load condition and the function is internally blocked by activating the INT_BLKD output.
  • Page 605 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions change in the magnitude of I (ΔI ) on the other sets of the current transformer (other than where zero current is detected) is calculated. If the change is detected on the healthy sets of CT, it is an indication of system failure. •...
  • Page 606 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.4.5 Application Open or short-circuited current transformer secondary can cause unwanted operation in many protection functions, such as earth-fault current and differential. The simplest method for detecting the current transformer secondary failure is by comparing currents from two independent three-phase sets of CTs or the CT cores measuring the same primary currents.
  • Page 607 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions Overload / System short circuit condition It is required that any overload or short circuit conditions after a CT failure should block the function. During overload or short circuit condition, the phase current increases beyond its rated value;...
  • Page 608 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions Table 434: MCS 3I,I2 Output signals Name Type Description FAIL BOOLEAN CT secondary failure FAIL_CTGRP1 BOOLEAN CT secondary failure group 1 FAIL_CTGRP2 BOOLEAN CT secondary failure group 2 FAIL_CTGRP3 BOOLEAN CT secondary failure group 3 ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm...
  • Page 609 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.5.2 Function block GUID-0A336F51-D8FA-4C64-A7FE-7A4270E621E7-ANSI V1 EN Figure 307: Function block 6.5.3 Functionality The fuse failure supervision function 60 is used to block the voltage-measuring functions when failure occurs in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and protection relay to avoid misoperations of the voltage protection functions.
  • Page 610 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions GUID-6891B535-AE42-4785-88B9-7A1C9122C9A9 V1 EN Figure 308: Functional module diagram Negative phase-sequence criterion A fuse failure based on the negative-sequence criterion is detected if the measured negative-sequence voltage exceeds the set Neg Seq voltage Lev value and the measured negative-sequence current is below the set Neg Seq current Lev value.
  • Page 611 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions • Change of voltage dV/dt • Change of current dI/dt The calculated delta quantities are compared to the respective set values of the Current change rate and Voltage change rate settings. The delta current and delta voltage algorithms detect a fuse failure if there is a sufficient negative change in the voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in the current amplitude in each phase separately.
  • Page 612 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions Table 437: Fuse failure output control Fuse failure detection criterion Conditions and function response Negative-sequence criterion If a fuse failure is detected based on the negative sequence criterion, the FUSEF_V output is activated. If the fuse failure detection is active for more than five seconds and at the same time all the phase voltage values are below the set value of the Seal in voltage...
  • Page 613 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.5.5 Application Some protection functions operate on the basis of the measured voltage value in the protection relay point. These functions can fail if there is a fault in the measuring circuits between the voltage transformers and protection relay. A fault in the voltage-measuring circuit is called a fuse failure.
  • Page 614 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.5.6 Signals Table 438: 60 Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current SIGNAL Negative sequence current V_A_AB SIGNAL Phase A voltage V_B_BC SIGNAL Phase B voltage V_C_CA SIGNAL...
  • Page 615 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Min Op current delta 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.10 Minimum trip level of phase current for delta calculation Seal in voltage 0.01...1.00 0.01 0.70 Trip level of seal-in phase voltage Enable seal in 0=False 0=False...
  • Page 616 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.6.2 Function block GUID-CCCBE20D-0546-41DB-8C68-A32EFD28E9D1 V4 EN Figure 310: Function block 6.6.3 Functionality The motor start-up supervision function 66/51LRS is designed for protection against excessive starting time and locked rotor conditions of the motor during starting. For the reliable operation of the motor, the thermal stress during the motor starting is maintained within the allowed limits.
  • Page 617 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions GUID-35DD1223-14B2-48BF-ADF4-4A1DF6930314 V1 EN Figure 311: Functional module diagram Startup supervisor This module detects the starting of the motor. The starting and stalling motor conditions are detected in four different modes of operation. This is done through the Operation mode setting.
  • Page 618 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions equal to or greater than Motor standstill A, the MOT_START output signal is activated indicating that the motor start-up is in progress. The MOT_START output remains active until the values of all three phase currents drop below 90 percent of the set value of Start detection A and remain below that level for a time of Str over delay time, that is, until the start-up situation is over.
  • Page 619 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions This CB mode can be used in soft-started or slip ring motors for protection against a large starting current, that is, a problem in starting and so on. GUID-DDAD7B3F-28BE-4573-BE79-FBB488A22ECA V1 EN GUID-1470A4DB-310F-46BC-B775-843EAB8BA836 V1 EN Figure 313: Functionality of start-up supervision in the "IIt, CB"...
  • Page 620 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions this mode of operation, the value of the setting is in the range of around 100 milliseconds. • In the “IIt, CB” or “IIt & stall, CB” modes, the purpose of this setting is to check for the life of the protection scheme after the CB_CLOSED input has been activated.
  • Page 621 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions The activation of the BLOCK input signal resets the thermal stress calculator and deactivates the OPR_IIT output. Stall protection This module is activated only when the selected Operation mode setting value is "IIt & stall"...
  • Page 622 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions GUID-200BC4CB-8B33-4616-B014-AFCC99ED9224 V2 EN Figure 314: Time delay for cumulative start This module also protects the motor from consecutive start-ups. When the LOCK_START output is active, T_RST_ENA shows the possible time for next restart. The value of T_RST_ENA is calculated by the difference of Restart inhibit time and the elapsed time from the instant LOCK_START is enabled.
  • Page 623 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions The full-voltage starting or the direct-on-line starting method is used out of the many methods used for starting the induction motor. If there is either an electrical or mechanical constraint, this starting method is not suitable. The full-voltage starting produces the highest starting torque.
  • Page 624 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions The starting times vary depending on motor design and load torque characteristics. The time taken may vary from less than two seconds to more than 60 seconds. The starting time is determined for each application. When the permissible stall time is less than the starting time of the motor, the stalling protection is used and the value of the time delay setting should be set slightly less than the permissible stall time.
  • Page 625 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions GUID-6E9B7247-9009-4302-A79B-B326009ECC7A V2 EN Figure 316: Typical motor-starting and capability curves Setting of Cumulative time Lim Cumulative time Lim is calculated by ∑ − × + t margin (Equation 93) GUID-0214B677-48D0-4DD4-BD1E-67BA9FD3C345 V1 EN specified maximum allowed number of motor start-ups start-up time of the motor (in seconds) margin safety margin (~10...20 percent) Setting of Counter Red rate...
  • Page 626 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.6.6 Signals Table 443: 66/51LRS Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block of function BLK_LK_ST BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks lock out condition for restart of motor CB_CLOSED BOOLEAN 0=False...
  • Page 627 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions Table 446: 66/51LRS Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Operation mode 1=IIt 1=IIt Motor start-up operation mode 2=IIt, CB 3=IIt + stall 4=IIt + stall, CB Counter Red rate 2.0...250.0...
  • Page 628 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.6.9 Technical data Table 448: 66/51LRS Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × I Minimum Typical Maximum 1)2) Pickup time...
  • Page 629 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions The phase discontinuity protection function provides individual counter values for the number of times a self-clearing fault is observed in each phase. The phase discontinuity protection function also determines whether the self-clearing fault is observed in all three phases or not.
  • Page 630 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions PickUpNoTripC in the monitored data is set to "True". Once the fault is detected in phase B or phase C, the corresponding fault count SCB or SCC is incremented. If the AdapPhPu setting is set to "True", the threshold setting value PhPu is adaptively calculated for each phase separately.
  • Page 631 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.7.6 Settings Table 451: CFD Group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description PhPu 0...100000 Fault Pickup parameter Threshold CyMulit 1...20 Fault detect threshold parameter AbsMinLoad 0...300 Absolute min loading on the feeder AdapPhPu 0=False 0=False...
  • Page 632 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions Runtime counter for machines and devices OPTM 6.8.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Runtime counter for machines and MDSOPT OPTS OPTM devices 6.8.2 Function block GUID-C20AF735-FF25-411B-9EA6-11D595484613-ANSI V2 EN Figure 319: Function block 6.8.3...
  • Page 633 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions GUID-6BE6D1E3-F3FB-45D9-8D6F-A44752C1477C V1 EN Figure 320: Functional module diagram Operation time counter This module counts the operation time. When POS_ACTIVE is active, the count is continuously added to the time duration until it is deactivated. At any time the OPR_TIME output is the total duration for which POS_ACTIVE is active.
  • Page 634 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.8.5 Application The machine operating time since commissioning indicates the use of the machine. For example, the mechanical wear and lubrication requirement for the shaft bearing of the motors depend on the use hours. If some motor is used for long duration runs, it might require frequent servicing, while for a motor that is not used regularly the maintenance and service are scheduled less frequently.
  • Page 635 Section 6 1MAC504801-IB E Supervision functions 6.8.7 Settings Table 456: OPTM Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Warning value 0...299999 8000 Warning value for operation time supervision Alarm value 0...299999 10000 Alarm value for operation time supervision...
  • Page 637 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions Section 7 Measurement functions Basic measurements 7.1.1 Functions The three-phase current measurement function IA, IB, IC is used for monitoring and metering the phase currents of the power system. The three-phase voltage measurement function VA, VB, VC is used for monitoring and metering the phase-to-phase voltages of the power system.
  • Page 638 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions If the measured data is within parentheses, there are some problems to express the data. 7.1.2 Measurement functionality The functions can be enabled or disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “Enable” and “Disable”. Some of the measurement functions operate on two alternative measurement modes: "DFT"...
  • Page 639 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions Value reporting The measurement functions are capable of reporting new values for network control center (SCADA system) based on the following functions: • Zero-point clamping • Deadband supervision • Limit value supervision In the three-phase voltage measurement function VA, VB, VC the supervision functions are based on the phase-to-phase voltages.
  • Page 640 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions Limit value supervision The limit value supervision function indicates whether the measured value of X_INST exceeds or falls below the set limits. The measured value has the corresponding range information X_RANGE and has a value in the range of 0 to 4: •...
  • Page 641 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions Table 460: Settings for limit value supervision Function Settings for limit value supervision Three-phase current measurement (IA, IB, High limit A high limit A low limit Low limit A high high limit High-high limit Low-low limit A low low limit V high limit...
  • Page 642 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions Function Settings for limit value supervision Three-phase power and energy High limit measurement (SP, SE) Low limit High-high limit Low-low limit Three-phase power and energy High limit measurement (P, E) Low limit High-high limit Low-low limit Deadband supervision The deadband supervision function reports the measured value according to integrated...
  • Page 643 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions I_INST_A = I_DB_A = 0.30 If I_INST_A changes to 0.40, the reporting delay is: 40 0 − × 2500 1000 − × 0 40 0 30 100 GUID-D1C387B1-4F2E-4A28-AFEA-431687DDF9FE V1 EN Table 461: Parameters for deadband calculation Function Settings Maximum/minimum (=range)
  • Page 644 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions Once the complex apparent power is calculated, P, Q, S and PF are calculated with the equations: = Re( ) (Equation 97) GUID-92B45FA5-0B6B-47DC-9ADB-69E7EB30D53A V3 EN = Im( ) (Equation 98) GUID-CA5C1D5D-3AD9-468C-86A1-835525F8BE27 V2 EN (Equation 99) GUID-B3999831-E376-4DAF-BF36-BA6F761230A9 V2 EN ϕ...
  • Page 645 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions Table 462: Power quadrants Quadrant Current Power Lagging 0…+1.00 +ind Lagging 0…-1.00 -cap Leading 0…-1.00 -ind Leading 0…+1.00 +cap The active power P direction can be selected between forward and reverse with Active power Dir and correspondingly the reactive power Q direction can be selected with Reactive power Dir.
  • Page 646 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions periodic comparison of the measured value from the protection relay to other independent meters. When the zero signal is measured, the noise in the input signal can still produce small measurement values. The zero point clamping function can be used to ignore the noise in the input signal and, hence, prevent the noise to be shown in the user display.
  • Page 647 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.4.3 Signals Table 463: IA,IB,IC Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for all binary outputs Table 464: IA,IB,IC Output signals Name Type...
  • Page 648 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.4.5 Monitored data Table 466: IA,IB,IC Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description IA-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Measured current amplitude phase A IB-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Measured current amplitude phase B IC-A FLOAT32 0.00...40.00 Measured current amplitude phase C Max demand IA FLOAT32...
  • Page 649 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.4.6 Technical data Table 467: IA, IB, IC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the measured current: f ±2 Hz at currents in the range of 0.01...4.00 × I Current: ±0.5% or ±0.002 ×...
  • Page 650 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions Table 469: VA, VB, VC Output signals Name Type Description HIGH_ALARM BOOLEAN High alarm HIGH_WARN BOOLEAN High warning LOW_WARN BOOLEAN Low warning LOW_ALARM BOOLEAN Low alarm 7.1.5.4 Settings Table 470: VA, VB, VC Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit...
  • Page 651 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.5.6 Technical data Table 472: VA, VB, VC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured: f ±2 Hz At voltages in range 0.01…1.15 × V Voltage:±0.5% or ±0.002 × V Phase angle:±2.5°...
  • Page 652 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.6.4 Settings Table 475: IG Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode 2=DFT A Hi high limit res 0.00...40.00 High alarm current limit A high limit res...
  • Page 653 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.7 Residual voltage measurement VG 7.1.7.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Residual voltage measurement RESVMMXU 7.1.7.2 Function block A070779-ANSI V1 EN Figure 327: Function block 7.1.7.3 Signals Table 478: VG Input signals...
  • Page 654 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.7.4 Settings Table 480: VG Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Measurement mode 1=RMS 2=DFT Selects used measurement mode 2=DFT V Hi high limit res 0.00...4.00 0.20 High alarm voltage limit...
  • Page 655 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.8.2 Function block A070784-ANSI V1 EN Figure 328: Function block 7.1.8.3 Signals Table 483: I1, I2, I0 Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Zero sequence current SIGNAL Positive sequence current SIGNAL Negative sequence current 7.1.8.4 Settings Table 484:...
  • Page 656 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Ng Seq A low low Lim 0.00...40.00 0.00 Low alarm current limit for negative sequence current Ng Seq A deadband 100...100000 2500 Deadband configuration value for negative sequence current for integral calculation.
  • Page 657 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.8.7 Technical revision history Table 487: I1, I2, I0 Technical revision history Technical revision Change Sequence current angle values added to the Monitored data view. Internal improvement. 7.1.9 Sequence voltage measurement V1, V2, V0 7.1.9.1 Identification Function description...
  • Page 658 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.9.4 Settings Table 489: V1, V2, V0 Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Ps Seq V Hi high Lim 0.00...4.00 High alarm voltage limit for positive sequence voltage Ps Seq V high limit 0.00...4.00...
  • Page 659: Monitored Data

    Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.9.5 Monitored data Table 490: V1, V2, V0 Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description V2-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Measured negative sequence voltage V1-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Measured positive sequence voltage V0-kV FLOAT32 0.00...4.00 Measured zero sequence voltage 7.1.9.6 Technical data...
  • Page 660: Signals

    Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.10.3 Signals Table 492: P, E Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current SIGNAL Phase A voltage SIGNAL Phase B voltage SIGNAL Phase C voltage RSTACM BOOLEAN 0=False...
  • Page 661: Monitored Data

    Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.10.5 Monitored data Table 494: P, E Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description S-kVA FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 Apparent power, magnitude of 99.9 instantaneous value P-kW FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 Active power, magnitude of 99.9 instantaneous value Q-kVAr FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999...
  • Page 662: Technical Data

    Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.10.6 Technical data Table 495: P, E Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy At all three currents in range 0.10…1.20 × I At all three voltages in range 0.50…1.15 × V At the frequency f ±1 Hz Active power and energy in range |PF| >...
  • Page 663: Settings

    Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A voltage SIGNAL Phase B voltage SIGNAL Phase C voltage RSTACM BOOLEAN 0=False Reset of accumulated energy reading 7.1.11.4 Settings Table 497: SP, SE Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step...
  • Page 664 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description QA-kVAr FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Reactive power, magnitude of 99.9 instantaneous value, Phase A QB-kVAr FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Reactive power, magnitude of 99.9 instantaneous value, Phase B QC-kVAr FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Reactive power, magnitude of...
  • Page 665 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Min demand QB FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Minimum demand for Phase 99.9 Min demand QC FLOAT32 -999999.9...9999 kVAr Minimum demand for Phase 99.9 Time max dmd SA Timestamp Time of maximum demand phase SA Time max dmd SB Timestamp...
  • Page 666: Technical Data

    Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.11.6 Technical data Table 499: SP, SE Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy At all three currents in range 0.10…1.20 x I At all three voltages in range 0.50…1.15 x V At the frequency f ±1 Hz Active power and energy in range |PF| >...
  • Page 667: Settings

    Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.1.12.4 Settings Table 501: f Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable F high high limit 35.00...75.00 High alarm frequency limit F high limit 35.00...75.00 High warning frequency limit F low limit...
  • Page 668: Function Block

    Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.2.2 Function block GUID-9FF20342-1B3C-45DB-8FB5-50389401AEF5-ANSI V2 EN Figure 333: Function block 7.2.3 Functionality The binary converter function 84T is used for converting binary-coded tap position inputs to their decimal equivalent when a tap position indication is received from the I/O board with the help of the coded binary inputs.
  • Page 669 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions Tap position decoder When there is a wired connection to the TAP_POS input connector, the corresponding tap changer position is decoded from the mA or RTD input. When there is no wired connection to the TAP_POS connector, the binary inputs are expected to be used for the tap changer position information.
  • Page 670 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions Table 504: Truth table of the decoding modes Inputs TAP_POS outputs SIGN_ NAT2I BCD2I GRAY2 —3 —3 —2 —2 —2 —3 —1 —1 —1 Table continues on next page 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 671: Application

    Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions Inputs TAP_POS outputs 7.2.5 Application 84T provides tap position information for other functions as a signed integer value that can be fed to the tap position input. The position information of the tap changer can be coded in various methods for many applications, for example, the differential protection algorithms.
  • Page 672: Signals

    Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions AI_VAL1 SIGN_BIT T_F32_INT8 TAP_POS INT8 GUID-2500DFA7-F5CC-4F8B-BDEF-D052E3C07FFF V1 EN Figure 335: RTD/analog input configuration example 7.2.6 Signals Table 505: 84T Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Binary input 1 BOOLEAN 0=False Binary input 2 BOOLEAN 0=False Binary input 3...
  • Page 673 Section 7 1MAC504801-IB E Measurement functions 7.2.9 Technical data Table 507: 84T Technical data Descrpition Value Response time for binary inputs Typical 100 ms 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 675: Identification

    Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Section 8 Power quality measurement functions Current total demand distortion PQI 8.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Current total demand distortion CMHAI PQM3I 8.1.2 Function block GUID-972900BB-F0EB-41A7-BEB3-86ABA0F54BDF V1 EN Figure 336:...
  • Page 676 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Distortion Demand measure- ALARM calculation ment BLOCK GUID-E5EC5FFE-7679-445B-B327-A8B1759D90C4 V1 EN Figure 337: Functional module diagram Distortion measurement The distortion measurement module measures harmonics up to the 11th harmonic. The total demand distortion TDD is calculated from the measured harmonic components with the formula ∑...
  • Page 677 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions however, a customer-driven issue. It could be said that any power problem concerning voltage or current that results in a failure or misoperation of customer equipment is a power quality problem. Harmonic distortion in a power system is caused by nonlinear devices. Electronic power converter loads constitute the most important class of nonlinear loads in a power system.
  • Page 678 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions 8.1.7 Settings Table 510: PQI Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 1=enable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Demand interval 0=1 minute 2=10 minutes Time interval for demand calculation 1=5 minutes 2=10 minutes 3=15 minutes...
  • Page 679 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Voltage total harmonic distortion PQVPH 8.2.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Voltage total harmonic distortion VMHAI PQM3U PQVPH 8.2.2 Function block GUID-CF203BDC-8C9A-442C-8D31-1AD55110469C-ANSI V1 EN Figure 338: Function block 8.2.3...
  • Page 680 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Distortion measurement The distortion measurement module measures harmonics up to the 11th harmonic. The total harmonic distortion THD for voltage is calculated from the measured harmonic components with the formula ∑ (Equation 102) GUID-EF4F9D27-6E81-4697-B02C-EDBBD68CE9A8 V1 EN harmonic component the voltage fundamental component amplitude...
  • Page 681 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Table 513: PQVPH Output signals Name Type Description ALARM BOOLEAN Alarm signal for THD 8.2.7 Settings Table 514: PQVPH Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 5=disable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Demand interval...
  • Page 682 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description DMD_THD_B FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 Demand value for THD for phase B 3SMHTHD_C FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 3 second mean value of THD for phase C DMD_THD_C FLOAT32 0.00...500.00 Demand value for THD for phase C Voltage variation PQSS 8.3.1...
  • Page 683 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions PQSS contains a blocking functionality. It is possible to block a set of function outputs or the function itself, if desired. 8.3.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “Enable”...
  • Page 684 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions However, when Phase mode is "Three Phase", all the monitored phase signal magnitudes, defined with Phase supervision, have to fall below or rise above the limit setting to activate the PICKUP output and the corresponding phase output, that is, all the monitored phases have to be activated.
  • Page 685 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Voltage swell set Voltage dip set Voltage Int set TRUE SWELLST FALSE TRUE DIPST FALSE TRUE INTST FALSE A) Three phase mode TRUE SWELLST FALSE TRUE DIPST FALSE TRUE INTST FALSE B) Single phase mode GUID-F44C8E6E-9354-44E4-9B2E-600D66B76C1A-ANSI V2 EN Figure 342: Detection of three-phase voltage interruption...
  • Page 686 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions 8.3.4.3 Variation validation The validation criterion for voltage variation is that the measured total variation duration is between the set minimum and maximum durations (Either one of VVa dip time 1, VVa swell time 1 or VVa Int time 1, depending on the variation type, and VVa Dur Max).
  • Page 687 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Figure 344, the corresponding limits regarding the swell operation are provided with the inherent magnitude limit order difference. The swell functionality principle is the same as for dips, but the different limits for the signal magnitude and times and the inherent operating zone change (here, Voltage swell set x >...
  • Page 688 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Generally, no event detection is done if both the magnitude and duration requirements are not fulfilled. For example, the dip event does not indicate if the TRMS voltage magnitude remains between Voltage dip set 3 and Voltage dip set 2 for a period shorter than VVa dip time 3 before rising back above Voltage dip set 3.
  • Page 689 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions There is a validation functionality built-in function that checks the relationship adherence so that if VVa x time 1 is set higher than VVa x time 2 or VVa x time 3, VVa x time 2 and VVa x time 3 are set equal to the new VVa x time 1.
  • Page 690 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions GUID-922C1D16-46ED-4825-8C9A-4750CCB0B778-ANSI V1 EN Figure 346: Single-phase interruption for the Phase mode value "Single Phase" 8.3.4.5 Three/single-phase selection variation examples The provided rules always apply for single-phase (Phase Mode is "Single Phase") power systems.
  • Page 691 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions GUID-0657A163-7D42-4543-8EC8-3DF84E2F0BF5-ANSI V1 EN Figure 347: Concurrent dip and swell when Phase mode is "Single Phase" Figure 348, one phase is in dip and two phases have a swell indication. For the Phase Mode Dip value "Three Phase", the activation occurs only when all the phases are active.
  • Page 692 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions GUID-1C0C906B-EC91-4C59-9291-B5002830E590-ANSI V1 EN Figure 348: Concurrent dip and two-phase swell 8.3.5 Recorded data Besides counter increments, the information required for a later fault analysis is stored after a valid voltage variation is detected. 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 693 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Recorded data information When voltage variation starts, the phase current magnitudes preceding the activation moment are stored. Also, the initial voltage magnitudes are temporarily stored at the variation pickup moment. If the variation is, for example, a two-phase voltage dip, the voltage magnitude of the non-active phase is stored from this same moment, as shown in Figure 349.
  • Page 694 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions GUID-7A859344-8960-4CF3-B637-E2DE6D3BDA85-ANSI V1 EN Figure 349: Valid recorded voltage interruption and two dips Table 516: PQSS recording data bank parameters Parameter description Parameter name Event detection triggering time stamp Time Variation type Variation type Variation magnitude Ph A Variation Ph A Variation magnitude Ph A time stamp (maximum/...
  • Page 695 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Parameter description Parameter name Variation Ph B start time stamp (phase B variation Var Dur Ph B time start time moment) Variation duration Ph C Variation Dur Ph C Variation Ph C start time stamp (phase C variation Var Dur Ph C time start time moment) Current magnitude Ph A preceding variation...
  • Page 696 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions GUID-D61DBDF6-7C1B-492E-94CB-C6A2EC7C1463-ANSI V1 EN Figure 350: Duration and voltage magnitude limits for swell, dip and interruption measurement Voltage dips disturb the sensitive equipment such as computers connected to the power system and may result in the failure of the equipment. Voltage dips are typically caused by faults occurring in the power distribution system.
  • Page 697 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Voltage variation measurement can be done to the phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase voltages. The power quality standards do not specify whether the measurement should be done to phase or phase-to-phase voltages. However, in some cases it is preferable to use phase-to-earth voltages for measurement.
  • Page 698 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description VVa swell time 1 0.5...54.0 cycles Voltage variation swell duration 1 Voltage swell set 2 100.0...140.0 120.0 Swell limit 2 in % of reference voltage VVa swell time 2 10.0...80.0 cycles...
  • Page 699 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description INSTSWELLCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Instantaneous swell operation counter MOMSWELLCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Momentary swell operation counter TEMPSWELLCNT INT32 0...2147483647 Temporary swell operation counter MAXDURSWELLCN INT32 0...2147483647 Maximum duration swell operation counter INSTDIPCNT INT32...
  • Page 700 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Var Ph C rec time Timestamp Variation magnitude Phase C time stamp Variation Dur Ph A FLOAT32 0.000...3600.000 Variation duration Phase A Var Dur Ph A time Timestamp Variation Ph A start time stamp...
  • Page 701 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description Var current Ph A FLOAT32 0.00...60.00 Current magnitude Phase A preceding variation Var current Ph B FLOAT32 0.00...60.00 Current magnitude Phase B preceding variation Var current Ph C FLOAT32 0.00...60.00 Current magnitude Phase C...
  • Page 702 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Voltage unbalance PQVUB 8.4.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Voltage unbalance VSQVUB PQMUBU PQVUB 8.4.2 Function block PQVUB MN_UNB_AL PCT_UNB_AL OBS_PR_ACT BLOCK GUID-5248E9E7-BE34-4B9E-B402-611B2557E536 V2 EN Figure 351: Function block 8.4.3...
  • Page 703 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions 8.4.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “Enable” and “Disable”. The operation of the voltage unbalance power quality function can be described with a module diagram.
  • Page 704 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Voltage unbalance detector The three-second average value is calculated and compared to the set value Unbalance start val. If the voltage unbalance exceeds this limit, the MN_UNB_AL output is activated. The activation of the BLOCK input blocks MN_UNB_AL output. Percentile calculation The Percentile calculation module performs the statistics calculation for the level of voltage unbalance value for a settable duration.
  • Page 705 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions If the Percentile unbalance, Trigger mode or Obs period duration settings change when OBS_PR_ACT is active, OBS_PR_ACT deactivates immediately. OBS_PR_ACT Trigger mode - Single Obs period selection – 4 (7 days) TIme 7 days Trigger mode - Continuous...
  • Page 706 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Statistics recorder The Statistics recorder module provides readily calculated three-second or ten-minute values of the selected phase to the percentile calculator module based on the length of the active observation period. If the observation period is less than one day, the three-second average values are used.
  • Page 707 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions The recorded data can be reset with the RESET binary input signal by navigating to the HMI reset (Main menu/Clear/Reset recorded data/PQVUBx) or through tools via communications. When voltage unbalance is detected in the system, PQVUB responds with the MN_UNB_AL alarm signal.
  • Page 708 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Another major application is the long-term power quality monitoring. This can be used to confirm a compliance to the standard power supply quality norms. The function provides a voltage unbalance level which corresponds to the 95 percentile of the ten minutes' average values of voltage unbalance recorded over a period of up to one week.
  • Page 709 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions 8.4.7 Settings Table 526: PQVUB Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Opeartion 1=enable 5=disable Opeartion Enable/Disable 5=disable Unb detection method 1=Neg Seq 3=Neg to Pos Seq Set the operation mode for voltage unbalance 2=Zero Seq calculation 3=Neg to Pos Seq...
  • Page 710 Section 8 1MAC504801-IB E Power quality measurement functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description PR_END_TIME Timestamp Time stamp of end of previous observation period Alarm high mean Dur FLOAT32 0.000...3600.000 Time duration for alarm high mean unbalance Max unbalance Volt FLOAT32 0.00...100.00 Maximum 3 sec voltage...
  • Page 711: Identification

    Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Section 9 Control functions Circuit-breaker control 52 9.1.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Circuit-breaker control CBXCBR I<->O CB 9.1.2 Function block A071284-ANSI V3 EN Figure 355: Function block 9.1.3 Functionality...
  • Page 712: Operation Principle

    Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions 9.1.4 Operation principle Status indication and validity check The object state is defined by two digital inputs, POSOPEN and POSCLOSE, which are also available as outputs OPENPOS and CLOSEPOS together with the OKPOS information. The debouncing and short disturbances in an input are eliminated by filtering.
  • Page 713 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Table 530: Interlocking conditions for enabling the closing (opening) command Inputs Outputs INT_BYPASS ENA_CLOSE BLK_CLOSE CLOSE_ENAD (ENA_OPEN) (BLK_OPEN) (OPEN_ENAD) 0 = False 0 = False 0 = False 0 = False 0 = False 0 = False 1 = True 0 = False...
  • Page 714 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions interlocking signals can be transferred with a bus. All secured control operations require two-step commands: a selection step and an execution step. The secured object control is responsible for the several tasks. • Command authority: ensures that the command source is authorized to operate the object •...
  • Page 715: Application

    Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions 9.1.5 Application In the field of distribution and sub-transmission automation, reliable control and status indication of primary switching components both locally and remotely is in a significant role. They are needed especially in modern remotely controlled substations. Control and status indication facilities are implemented in the same package with 52.
  • Page 716: Signals

    Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions 9.1.6 Signals Table 531: 52 Input signals Name Type Default Description ENA_OPEN BOOLEAN 1=True Enables opening ENA_CLOSE BOOLEAN 1=True Enables closing BLK_OPEN BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks opening BLK_CLOSE BOOLEAN 0=False Blocks closing ITL_BYPASS BOOLEAN 0=False Discards ENA_OPEN and ENA_CLOSE interlocking when TRUE AU_OPEN...
  • Page 717: Monitored Data

    Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Control model 0=status-only 4=sbo-with- Select control model 1=direct-with- enhanced-security normal-security 4=sbo-with- enhanced-security Adaptive pulse 0=False 1=True Stop in right position 1=True Event delay 0...10000 Event delay of the intermediate position Operation timeout 10...60000 Timeout for negative termination...
  • Page 718: Function Block

    Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions 9.2.2 Function block A070836-ANSI V1 EN Figure 358: Function block 9.2.3 Functionality About 80 to 85 percent of faults in the MV overhead lines are transient and automatically cleared with a momentary de-energization of the line. The rest of the faults, 15 to 20 percent, can be cleared by longer interruptions.
  • Page 719 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Table 535: Control line setting definition Control line INIT_1 INIT_2 INIT_3 INIT_4 INIT_5 INIT_6 setting DEL_INIT_2 DEL_INIT_3 DEL_INIT_4 other other other other other other prot other other other other other other prot other other other other prot...
  • Page 720 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions second unit, that is the slave, is released to complete the reclose shot. With persistent faults, the breaker reclosing is limited to the first breaker. A070877 V1 EN Figure 359: Master and slave scheme If the AR unit is defined as a master by setting its terminal priority to high: •...
  • Page 721 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions 9.2.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “Enable” and “Disable”. The reclosing operation can be enabled and disabled with the Reclosing operation setting. This setting does not disable the function, only the reclosing functionality.
  • Page 722 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions A070865 V2 EN Figure 361: Schematic diagram of delayed initiation input signals In total, the AR function contains six separate initiation lines used for the initiation or blocking of the autoreclosing shots. These lines are divided into two types of channels. In three of these channels, the signal to the AR function can be delayed, whereas the other three channels do not have any delaying capability.
  • Page 723 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions • Str 2 delay shot 1 • Str 2 delay shot 2 • Str 2 delay shot 3 • Str 2 delay shot 4 Time delay settings for the DEL_INIT_3 signal • Str 3 delay shot 1 •...
  • Page 724 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions If the circuit breaker is manually closed against the fault, that is, if SOTF is used, the fourth time delay can automatically be taken into use. This is controlled with the internal logic of the AR function and the Fourth delay in SOTF parameter. A typical autoreclose situation is where one autoreclosing shot has been performed after the fault was detected.
  • Page 725 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions The autoreclosing shot is initiated with a trip signal of the protection function. The autoreclosing picks up when the protection trip delay time elapses. Normally, all trip and pickup signals are used to initiate an autoreclosing shot and trip the circuit breaker.
  • Page 726 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions attempt number (columns in the matrix), the initiation or blocking signals (rows in the matrix) and the reclose time of the shot. The settings related to CBB configuration are: • First...Seventh reclose time • Init signals CBB1…CBB7 •...
  • Page 727 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions A sequence initiation from the INIT_4 line leads to a lockout after two shots. In a situation where the initiation is made from both the INIT_3 and INIT_4 lines, a third shot is allowed, that is, CBB3 is allowed to start. This is called conditional lockout. If the initiation is made from the INIT_2 and INIT_3 lines, an immediate lockout occurs.
  • Page 728 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions A070870 V1 EN Figure 366: Logic diagram of auto-initiation sequence detection Automatic initiation can be selected with the Auto initiation Cnd setting to be the following: 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 729 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions • Not allowed: no automatic initiation is allowed • When the synchronization fails, the automatic initiation is carried out when the auto wait time elapses and the reclosing is prevented due to a failure during the synchronism check •...
  • Page 730 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions The shot pointer starts from an initial value "1" and determines according to the settings whether or not a certain shot is allowed to be initiated. After every shot, the shot pointer value increases. This is carried out until a successful reclosing or lockout takes place after a complete shot sequence containing a total of five shots.
  • Page 731 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions When the reclose time has elapsed, the CLOSE_CB output is not activated until the following conditions are fulfilled: • The SYNC input must be TRUE if the particular CBB requires information about the synchronism •...
  • Page 732 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions GUID-30D1A46E-563A-4AB2-8AD5-1D63DDEBB7E3 V1 EN Figure 370: Initiation after elapsed discrimination time - new shot begins 9.2.4.5 Sequence controller When the LOCKED output is active, the AR function is in lockout. This means that new sequences cannot be initialized, because AR is insensitive to initiation commands. It can be released from the lockout state in the following ways.
  • Page 733 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions • The frequent operation counter limit is reached and new sequence is initiated. The lockout is released when the recovery timer elapses. • The protection trip signal has been active longer than the time set with the Max wait time parameter since the shot initiation.
  • Page 734 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions A070875-ANSI V1 EN Figure 371: Configuration example of using the PROT_CRD output for protection blocking If the Protection crd limit setting has the value "1", the instantaneous three-phase overcurrent protection function 50P-3 is disabled or blocked after the first shot. 9.2.4.7 Circuit breaker controller Circuit breaker controller contains two features: SOTF and frequent-operation counter.
  • Page 735 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions cases, SOTF is activated, but only for the reclaim time after energizing the power line and only when the circuit breaker is closed manually and not by the AR function. SOTF disables any initiation of an autoreclosing shot. The energizing of the power line is detected from the CB_POS information.
  • Page 736 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions limit. The lockout is released after the recovery time has elapsed. The recovery time can be defined with the Frq Op recovery time setting . If the circuit breaker is manually closed during the recovery time, the reclaim time is activated after the recovery timer has elapsed.
  • Page 737 The autoreclose function can be used with every circuit breaker that has the ability for a reclosing sequence. In 79 autoreclose function the implementing method of autoreclose sequences is patented by ABB Table 536: Important definitions related to autoreclosing...
  • Page 738 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions 9.2.6.1 Shot initiation A070869 V1 EN Figure 372: Example of an autoreclosing program with a reclose scheme matrix In the AR function, each shot can be programmed to locate anywhere in the reclose scheme matrix. The shots are like building blocks used to design the reclose program. The building blocks are called CBBs.
  • Page 739 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions signals. The Blk signals CBBx setting defines the blocking signals that are related to the CBB (rows in the matrix). The Shot number CBB1…CBB7 setting defines which shot is related to the CBB (columns in the matrix). For example, CBB1 settings are: •...
  • Page 740 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions INIT_2 and INIT_4 lines are active for the second shot, that is, the shot pointer is 2, CBB2 is started instead of CBB5. Even if the initiation signals are not received from the protection functions, the AR function can be set to continue from the second to the fifth reclose shot.
  • Page 741 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions A070870 V1 EN Figure 373: Logic diagram of auto-initiation sequence detection Automatic initiation can be selected with the Auto initiation Cnd setting to be the following: 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 742 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions • Not allowed: no automatic initiation is allowed • When the synchronization fails, the automatic initiation is carried out when the auto wait time elapses and the reclosing is prevented due to a failure during the synchronism check •...
  • Page 743 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions building blocks instead of fixed shots gives enhanced flexibility, allowing multiple and adaptive sequences. Each CBB is identical. The Shot number CBB_ setting defines at which point in the autoreclose sequence the CBB should be performed, that is, whether the particular CBB is going to be the first, second, third, fourth or fifth shot.
  • Page 744 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions 9.2.6.3 Configuration examples A070886-ANSI V1 EN Figure 375: Example connection between protection and autoreclosing functions in protection relay configuration It is possible to create several sequences for a configuration. Autoreclose sequences for overcurrent and non-directional ground-fault protection applications where high speed and delayed autoreclosings are needed can be as follows: Example 1.
  • Page 745 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions A070887 V1 EN Figure 376: Autoreclosing sequence with two shots First reclose time Time delay of high-speed autoreclosing, here: HSAR Second reclose time Time delay of delayed autoreclosing, here: Operating time for the protection stage to clear the fault Protection Operating time for opening the circuit breaker CB_O...
  • Page 746 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Table 537: Settings for configuration example 1 Setting name Setting value Shot number CBB1 Init signals CBB1 7 (lines 1, 2 and 3 = 1+2+4 = 7) First reclose time 0.3s (an example) Shot number CBB2 Init signals CBB2 7 (lines 1, 2 and 3 = 1+2+4 = 7) Second reclose time...
  • Page 747 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions A071272 V1 EN Figure 378: Autoreclosing sequence with two shots with different shot settings according to initiation signal First reclose time Time delay of high-speed autoreclosing, here: HSAR Time delay of delayed autoreclosing, here: Second reclose time Operating time for the 50P-1 protection stage to clear the fault l>>...
  • Page 748 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions A071274-ANSI V1 EN Figure 379: Three shots with three initiation lines If the sequence is initiated from the INIT_1 line, that is, the overcurrent protection high stage, the sequence is one shot long. If the sequence is initiated from the INIT_2 or INIT_3 lines, the sequence is two shots long.
  • Page 749 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions The autoreclose function can also open the circuit breaker from any of the initiation lines. It is selected with the Tripping line setting. As a default, all initiation lines activate the OPEN_CB output. A070276 V1 EN Figure 380: Simplified logic diagram of initiation lines Each delayed initiation line has four different time settings:...
  • Page 750 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Example 1 When a two-shot-sequence is used, the pickup information from the protection function is routed to the DEL_INIT 2 input and the trip information to the INIT_2 input. The following conditions have to apply: •...
  • Page 751 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Example 1 The protection operation time is 0.5 seconds, the Fourth delay in SOTF parameter is set to "1" and the Str 2 delay shot 4 parameter is 0.05 seconds. The protection pickup signal is connected to the DEL_INIT_2 input.
  • Page 752: Settings

    Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Table 541: 79 Output signals Name Type Description OPEN_CB BOOLEAN Open command for circuit breaker CLOSE_CB BOOLEAN Close (reclose) command for circuit breaker CMD_WAIT BOOLEAN Wait for master command INPRO BOOLEAN Reclosing shot in progress, activated during dead time LOCKED BOOLEAN Signal indicating that AR is locked out...
  • Page 753 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Dsr time shot 2 0...10000 Discrimination time for second reclosing Dsr time shot 3 0...10000 Discrimination time for third reclosing Dsr time shot 4 0...10000 Discrimination time for fourth reclosing Terminal priority 1=None...
  • Page 754 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Fourth reclose time 0...300000 5000 Dead time for CBB4 Fifth reclose time 0...300000 5000 Dead time for CBB5 Sixth reclose time 0...300000 5000 Dead time for CBB6 Seventh reclose time 0...300000 5000...
  • Page 755 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Shot number CBB7 0...5 Shot number for CBB7 Str 2 delay shot 1 0...300000 Delay time for start2, 1st reclose Str 2 delay shot 2 0...300000 Delay time for start2 2nd reclose Str 2 delay shot 3 0...300000...
  • Page 756 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions 9.2.9 Monitored data Table 543: 79 Monitored data Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description DISA_COUNT BOOLEAN 0=False Signal for counter disabling 1=True FRQ_OPR_CNT INT32 0...2147483647 Frequent operation counter FRQ_OPR_AL BOOLEAN 0=False Frequent operation counter 1=True alarm STATUS...
  • Page 757: Identification

    Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Name Type Values (Range) Unit Description COUNTER INT32 0...2147483647 Resetable operation counter, all shots SHOT_PTR INT32 0...7 Shot pointer value MAN_CB_CL BOOLEAN 0=False Indicates CB manual closing 1=True during reclosing sequence SOTF BOOLEAN 0=False Switch-onto-fault 1=True Enum...
  • Page 758 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions 9.3.3 Functionality The synchrocheck function 25 checks the condition across the circuit breaker from separate power system parts and gives the permission to close the circuit breaker. 25 includes the functionality of synchrocheck and energizing check. Asynchronous operation mode is provided for asynchronously running systems.
  • Page 759 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions The Synchro check function can operate either with the V_AB or V_A voltages. The selection of used voltages is defined with the VT connection setting of the line voltage general parameters. Energizing check The Energizing check function checks the energizing direction. Energizing is defined as a situation where a dead network part is connected to an energized section of the network.
  • Page 760 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Synchro check The Synchro check function measures the difference between the line voltage and bus voltage. The function trips and issues a closing command to the circuit breaker when the calculated closing angle is equal to the measured phase angle and if the conditions are simultaneously fulfilled.
  • Page 761 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Difference angle Difference frequency V_Bus V_Line V_Bus V_Line V_Bus Difference voltage V_Line V_Line V_Bus Live line or bus value Dead line or bus value Frequency[Hz] Frequency deviation Rated frequency GUID-72527DBF-2FC1-4E3B-BE9D-E5978DB3BDA4 V2 EN Figure 383: Conditions to be fulfilled when detecting synchronism between systems When the frequency, phase angle and voltage conditions are fulfilled, the duration of the synchronism conditions is checked so as to ensure that they are still met when the...
  • Page 762 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions FR_DIFF_MEAS and PH_DIFF_MEAS. Also, the indications of the conditions that are not fulfilled and thus preventing the breaker closing permission are available as monitored data values V_DIFF_SYNC, PH_DIF_SYNC and FR_DIFF_SYNC. These monitored data values are updated only when the Synchro check enabled with the Synchro check mode setting and the measured ENERG_STATE is "Both Live".
  • Page 763 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Closing Closing command request GUID-2AF445C8-388A-42DF-B5B3-070C34F3C7AB V2 EN Figure 385: A simplified block diagram of SECRSYN in the command mode operation The closing signal is delivered only once for each activated external closing command signal. The pulse length of the delivered closing is set with the Close pulse setting. t = Close pulse GUID-0D9A1A7F-58D1-4081-B974-A3CE10DEC5AF V2 EN Figure 386:...
  • Page 764 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Maximum Syn time GUID-FA8ADA22-6A90-4637-AA1C-714B1D0DD2CF V2 EN Figure 387: Determination of the checking time for closing The control module receives information about the circuit breaker status and thus is able to adjust the command signal to be delivered to the Synchro check function. If the external command signal CL_COMMAND is kept active longer than necessary, the CMD_FAIL_AL alarm output is activated.
  • Page 765 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Closing is permitted during Maximum Syn time, starting from the moment the external command signal CL_COMMAND is activated. The CL_COMMAND input must be kept active for the whole time that the closing conditions are waited to be fulfilled. Otherwise, the procedure is cancelled.
  • Page 766 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions GUID-B31F78EB-3DAD-40EF-A74B-5833C7B8696A-ANSI V1 EN Figure 389: Angle difference when power transformer is in sychrocheck zone The vector group of the power transformer is defined with clock numbers, where the value of the hour pointer defines the low-voltage-side phasor and the high-voltage-side phasor is always fixed to the clock number 12, which is same as zero.
  • Page 767 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions 9.3.5 Application The main purpose of the synchrocheck function is to provide control over the closing of the circuit breakers in power networks to prevent the closing if the conditions for synchronism are not detected. This function is also used to prevent the reconnection of two systems which are divided after islanding and a three-pole reclosing.
  • Page 768 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Connections A special attention is paid to the connection of the protection relay. Furthermore it is checked that the primary side wiring is correct. A faulty wiring of the voltage inputs of the protection relay causes a malfunction in the synchrocheck function.
  • Page 769 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions GUID-8C044A41-24DE-44D0-AAB4-E52D6BD61BC5 V1 EN Figure 391: Connection of voltages for the protection relay and signals used in synchrocheck 9.3.6 Signals Table 546: 25 Input signals Name Type Default Description V_BUS SIGNAL 0=False Busbar Voltage V_LINE SIGNAL 0=False Line Voltage...
  • Page 770 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Name Type Description CMD_FAIL_AL BOOLEAN CB closing request failed LLDB BOOLEAN Live Line, Dead Bus LLLB BOOLEAN Live Line, Live Bus DLLB BOOLEAN Dead Line, Live Bus DLDB BOOLEAN Dead Line, Dead Bus 9.3.7 Settings Table 548: 25 Group settings...
  • Page 771 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Maximum Syn time 100...6000000 2000 Maximum time to accept synchronizing Energizing time 100...60000 Time delay for energizing check Closing time of CB 40...250 Closing time of the breaker 9.3.8 Monitored data Table 550:...
  • Page 772 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions 9.3.9 Technical data Table 551: 25 Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy Depending on the frequency of the voltage measured: f ±1 Hz Voltage: ±3.0% of the set value or ±0.01 × U Frequency: ±10 mHz Phase angle: ±3°...
  • Page 773 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions The function provides up-count and down-count status outputs, which specify the relation of the counter value to a loaded preset value and to zero respectively. 9.4.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “Enable”...
  • Page 774 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions 9.4.5 Signals Table 552: CTR Input signals Name Type Default Description UP_CNT BOOLEAN 0=False Input for up counting DOWN_CNT BOOLEAN 0=False Input for down counting RESET BOOLEAN 0=False Reset input for counter LOAD BOOLEAN 0=False Load input for counter Table 553:...
  • Page 775 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions Emergency start-up 62EST 9.5.1 Identification Functional description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Emergency start-up ESMGAPC ESTART 62EST 9.5.2 Function block GUID-3AF99427-2061-47E1-B3AB-FD1C9BF98E76-ANSI V1 EN Figure 394: Function block 9.5.3 Functionality An emergency condition can arise in cases where the motor needs to be started despite knowing that this can increase the temperature above limits or cause a thermal overload that can damage the motor.
  • Page 776 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions GUID-18128621-4A78-45D0-A788-9116B5213449 V1 EN Figure 395: Functional module diagram Standstill detector The module detects if the motor is in a standstill condition. The standstill condition can be detected based on the phase current values. If all three phase currents are below the set value of Motor standstill A, the motor is considered to be in a standstill condition.
  • Page 777 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions 9.5.6 Signals Table 556: 62EST Input signals Name Type Default Description SIGNAL Phase A current SIGNAL Phase B current SIGNAL Phase C current BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode ST_EMERG_RQ BOOLEAN 0=False Emergency start input...
  • Page 778 Section 9 1MAC504801-IB E Control functions 9.5.9 Technical data Table 561: ESMGAPC Technical data Characteristic Value Operation accuracy At the frequency f = f ±1.5% of the set value or ±0.002 × U 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 779 Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions Section 10 Recording functions 10.1 Disturbance recorder DFR 10.1.1 Functionality The relay is provided with a disturbance recorder featuring up to 12 analog and 64 binary signal channels. The analog channels can be set to record either the waveform or the trend of the currents and voltages measured.
  • Page 780 Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions • Triggering according to the state change of any or several of the binary channels of the disturbance recorder. The user can set the level sensitivity with the Level trigger mode parameter of the corresponding binary channel. •...
  • Page 781 Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions Manual triggering The recorder can be triggered manually via the LHMI or via communication by setting the Trig recording parameter to TRUE. Periodic triggering Periodic triggering means that the recorder automatically makes a recording at certain time intervals.
  • Page 782 Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions Table 562: Sampling frequencies of the digital fault recorder analog channels Storage rate Recording length Sampling Sampling Sampling Sampling (samples per frequency of frequency of frequency of frequency of fundamental analog channels, binary channels, analog channels, binary channels, cycle)
  • Page 783 Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions The naming convention of 8+3 characters is used in COMTRADE file naming. The file name is composed of the last two octets of the protection relay's IP number and a running counter, which has a range of 1...9999. A hexadecimal representation is used for the IP number octets.
  • Page 784 Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions the recorder. The user can adjust the percentage of the data duration preceding the triggering, that is, the so-called pre-trigger time, with the Pre-trg length parameter. The duration of the data following the triggering, that is, the so-called post-trigger time, is the difference between the recording length and the pre-trigger time.
  • Page 785 Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions The exclusion time setting is global for all inputs, but there is an individual counter for each analog and binary channel of the disturbance recorder, counting the remaining exclusion time. The user can monitor the remaining exclusion time with the Exclusion time rem parameter of the corresponding analog or binary channel.
  • Page 786 Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions The Recording started parameter can be used to control the indication LEDs of the protection relay. The output of the Recording started parameter is TRUE due to the triggering of the disturbance recorder, until all the data for the corresponding recording is recorded.
  • Page 787: Settings

    Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions 10.1.4 Settings Table 563: DFR Non-group general settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=Enable 1=Enable DFR Enabled / 5=Disable Disabled Record length 10...500 fundamental Size of the cycles recording in fundamental cycles Pre-trg length 5...95...
  • Page 788 Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions Table 564: DFR Non-group channel settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=Enable 1=Enable for Analog 5=Disable Channels 1 - 4 channel is 5=Disable for enabled or channels 5 - 8 disabled Channel Select the selection...
  • Page 789 Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions Table 565: DFR Non-group binary channel settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=Enable 5=Disable Binary channel 5=Disable is enabled or disabled Level trigger 1=Positive or 1=Rising Level trigger mode Rising mode for the 2=Negative or binary channel Falling...
  • Page 790 Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions 10.1.5 Monitored data Table 567: DFR Monitored data Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Number of 0...100 Number of recordings recordings currently in memory Rem. amount 0...100 Remaining of rec. amount of recordings that fit into the available recording...
  • Page 791 Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions 10.2.3 Functionality The fault locator function FLO performs the estimation of apparent distance to fault and fault resistance. The calculation is performed by comparing the pre-fault current and voltage phasor by fault current and voltage phasor along with line parameters. The fault loop is determined and the respective voltage and current phasor are selected for the fault location algorithm.
  • Page 792 Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions Fault loop determination Any fault can be categorized as either a phase-to-phase fault or a phase-to-ground fault. The fault loop determination algorithm determines whether the fault is a phase-to-ground fault or phase-to-phase fault by comparing the phase currents to the zero-sequence current.
  • Page 793 Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions − Zero (Equation 104) GUID-DC024A67-96A6-42A0-A9CC-1D814F9CA607 V1 EN where I A I B I C _ ) / (Equation 105) GUID-522CAF08-239C-4194-89BD-FC39A043568D V1 EN 1.0 (scaling factor) and ZL refer to positive and zero-sequence line impedances. zero + j*XL + j*XL...
  • Page 794: Application

    Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions Table 569: protection relay voltage and current phasor identification FLTLOOP Current phasor Voltage phasor AG Fault BG Faul CG Fault ABG Fault (I_A - I_B) (V_A - V_B) BCG Fault (I_B - I_C) (V_B - V_C) CAG Fault (I_C - I_A) (V_C - V_A)
  • Page 795: Settings

    Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions The fault location algorithm is most applicable for radial feeder. The algorithm is based on the system model shown in Figure 399. The algorithm was designed to be used on a homogeneous radial distribution line. Therefore, the unit is not intended to be used on a distribution line with many different types of conductors because the algorithm is not as accurate.
  • Page 796: Monitored Data

    Section 10 1MAC504801-IB E Recording functions Table 571: FLO Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation 1=enable 5=disable Operation Disable / Enable 5=disable Line length 0.0...300.0 100.0 Length of the Line in miles or Km 0.000...20.000 0.001 1.000 Pos Seq Resistance in ohms/(miles or Km)
  • Page 797: Identification

    Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions Section 11 Other functions 11.1 Minimum pulse timer 11.1.1 Minimum pulse timer TP 11.1.1.1 Identification Functional description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Minimum pulse timer (2 pcs) TPGAPC 11.1.1.2 Function block GUID-976C7618-9B29-4C4C-B154-FC3F2B8CC470 V1 EN Figure 400:...
  • Page 798: Signals

    Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions GUID-8196EE39-3529-46DC-A161-B1C40224559F V1 EN Figure 401: A = Trip pulse is shorter than Pulse time setting, B = Trip pulse is longer than Pulse time setting 11.1.1.4 Signals Table 573: TPGAPC Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN...
  • Page 799: Function Block

    Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.1.2.2 Function block OUT1 OUT2 GUID-D60C7A7E-032B-4CB9-87A3-ED39AE32D26A V2 EN Figure 402: Function block 11.1.2.3 Functionality The minimum second pulse timer function TPS-1 contains two independent timers. The function has a settable pulse length (in seconds). The timers are used for setting the minimum pulse length for example, the signal outputs.
  • Page 800: Identification

    Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.1.3 Minimum minute pulse timer TPM 11.1.3.1 Identification Functional description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Minimum minute pulse timer (2 pcs) TPMGAPC 62-CLD 11.1.3.2 Function block OUT1 OUT2 GUID-3F486DF9-0D33-4D5F-9A57-BF1E9FD7C3DA V2 EN Figure 404: Function block 11.1.3.3...
  • Page 801: Signals

    Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.1.3.4 Signals Table 578: TPM Output signals Name Type Description OUT1 BOOLEAN Output 1 status OUT2 BOOLEAN Output 2 status 11.1.3.5 Settings Table 579: TPM Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Cold load time 0...300...
  • Page 802: Signals

    Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.2.3 Functionality The programmable function block FKEY is a simple interface between the panel and the application. The user input from the buttons available on the front panel is transferred to the assigned functionality and the corresponding LED is Enabled or Disabled for indication.
  • Page 803 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions Table 581: FKEY Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN KEY 1 BOOLEAN KEY 2 BOOLEAN KEY 3 BOOLEAN KEY 4 BOOLEAN KEY 5 BOOLEAN KEY 6 BOOLEAN KEY 7 BOOLEAN KEY 8 BOOLEAN KEY 9 BOOLEAN KEY 10 BOOLEAN...
  • Page 804 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.3.2 Functionality Move (8 pcs) MV is used for user logic bits. Each input state is directly copied to the output state. This allows the creating of events from advanced logic combinations. 11.3.3 Signals Table 582: MV Output signals Name...
  • Page 805 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.4.2 Function block GUID-5212B703-81FA-4330-AEC5-98293B9B1BB0 V2 EN Figure 408: Function block 11.4.3 Functionality The pulse timer function block PT contains eight independent timers. The function has a settable pulse length. Once the input is activated, the output is set for a specific duration using the Pulse delay time setting.
  • Page 806 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Input 6 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 7 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 8 status Table 585: PT Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output 1 status BOOLEAN Output 2 status BOOLEAN Output 3 status BOOLEAN...
  • Page 807 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.5 Generic control points CNTRL 11.5.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/ identification identification IEEEidentification Generic control points SPCGGIO CNTRL 11.5.2 Function block GUID-C2A6026C-1E8D-4382-9675-2C63E413998B V1 EN Figure 410: Function block 11.5.3 Functionality The generic control points function block CNTRL can be used in combination with other function blocks such as FKEYGGIO.
  • Page 808 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions CNTRL has the Operation mode, Pulse length and Description settings available to control all 16 outputs. By default, the Operation mode setting is set to "Off". This disables the controllable signal output. CNTRL also has a general setting Loc Rem restriction, which enables or disables the local or remote state functionality.
  • Page 809 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Input 6 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 7 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 8 status BOOLEAN 0=False Input 9 status IN10 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 10 status IN11 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 11 status IN12 BOOLEAN 0=False...
  • Page 810 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.5.6 Settings Table 590: CNTRL Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Loc Rem restriction 0=False 1=True Local remote switch restriction 1=True Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Toggle -1=Off Pulse length...
  • Page 811 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description Output 7 Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Toggle -1=Off Pulse length...
  • Page 812 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Toggle -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCGGIO1 Generic control point description Output 15 Operation mode 0=Pulsed...
  • Page 813 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.6.3 Functionality The remote control function block RCNTRL is dedicated only for remote controlling, that is, RCNTRL cannot be controlled locally. The remote control is provided through communications. 11.6.4 Operation principle The function can be enabled and disabled with the Operation setting. The corresponding parameter values are “Enable”...
  • Page 814 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.6.5 Signals Table 591: RCNTRL Input signals Name Type Default Description BLOCK BOOLEAN 0=False Block signal for activating the blocking mode Table 592: RCNTRL Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output 1 status BOOLEAN Output 2 status BOOLEAN Output 3 status...
  • Page 815 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Toggle -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCRGGIO1 Generic control point description Output 2 Operation mode 0=Pulsed...
  • Page 816 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCRGGIO1 Generic control point description Output 9 Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Toggle -1=Off Pulse length...
  • Page 817 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.7 Local generic control points LCNTRL 11.7.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/ identification identification IEEEidentification Local generic control points SPCLGGIO SPCL LCNTRL 11.7.2 Function block GUID-40CEB788-AF42-4DA3-AC5A-A168A6F6585E V1 EN Figure 412: Function block 11.7.3 Functionality The local control function block LCNTRL is dedicated only for local controlling, that is,...
  • Page 818 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions When the Operation mode is set to "Toggle", the corresponding output toggles between "True" and "False" for every input pulse received. The state of the output is stored in a nonvolatile memory and restored if the protection relay is restarted. When the Operation mode is set to "Pulsed", the corresponding output can be used to produce the predefined length of pulses.
  • Page 819 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output 6 status BOOLEAN Output 7 status BOOLEAN Output 8 status BOOLEAN Output 9 status BOOLEAN Output 10 status BOOLEAN Output 11 status BOOLEAN Output 12 status BOOLEAN Output 13 status BOOLEAN Output 14 status BOOLEAN...
  • Page 820 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Description SPCLGGIO1 Generic control point description Output 4 Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Toggle -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCLGGIO1 Generic control point description...
  • Page 821 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Operation mode 0=Pulsed -1=Off Operation mode for generic control point 1=Toggle -1=Off Pulse length 10...3600000 1000 Pulse length for pulsed operation mode Description SPCLGGIO1 Generic control point description Output 12 Operation mode 0=Pulsed...
  • Page 822 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.8.2 Function block GUID-3DD0D0F2-A477-4C73-B07C-089059EA3F26 V1 EN Figure 413: Function block 11.8.3 Functionality The set-reset (8 pcs) SR function block is a simple SR flip-flop with a memory that can be set or that can reset an output from the S# or R# inputs, respectively. The function contains eight independent set-reset flip-flop latches where the SET input has the higher priority over the RESET input.
  • Page 823 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.8.4 Signals Table 598: SR Input signals Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q1 output when set BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q1 output when set BOOLEAN 0=False Set Q2 output when set BOOLEAN 0=False Resets Q2 output when set BOOLEAN 0=False...
  • Page 824 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.8.5 Settings Table 600: SR Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Reset Q1 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q1 output when set 1=Reset Reset Q2 0=Cancel 0=Cancel Resets Q2 output when set 1=Reset Reset Q3 0=Cancel...
  • Page 825 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.9.3 Functionality Time delay off (8 pcs) TOF can be used, for example, for a drop-off-delayed output related to the input signal. The function contains eight independent timers. There is a settable delay in the timer. Once the input is activated, the output is set immediately. When the input is cleared, the output stays on until the time set with the Off delay time setting has elapsed.
  • Page 826 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output 6 status BOOLEAN Output 7 status BOOLEAN Output 8 status 11.9.5 Settings Table 603: TOF Non group settings Parameter Values (Range) Unit Step Default Description Off delay time 1 0...3600000 Off delay time Off delay time 2...
  • Page 827 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.10.2 Function block GUID-374A1F7D-951C-4A35-BFBF-45F9DE25AD94 V1 EN Figure 416: Function block 11.10.3 Functionality Time delay on (8 pcs) TON can be used, for example, for time-delaying the output related to the input signal. TON contains eight independent timers. The timer has a settable time delay.
  • Page 828 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions Name Type Default Description BOOLEAN 0=False Input 5 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 6 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 7 BOOLEAN 0=False Input 8 Table 606: TON Output signals Name Type Description BOOLEAN Output 1 BOOLEAN Output 2 BOOLEAN Output 3 BOOLEAN...
  • Page 829 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions 11.11 Three-phase measurement switching VSWI 11.11.1 Identification Function description IEC 61850 IEC 60617 ANSI/IEEE C37.2 identification identification device number Switch-controlled voltage VMSWI VSWI VSWI 11.11.2 Function block VSWI BUS_SW _BUS1 SOURCE _BUS2 SOURCE GUID-02F311C0-2918-4290-AB95-2F319B565325 V1 EN Figure 418: Function block 11.11.3...
  • Page 830 Section 11 1MAC504801-IB E Other functions The calculated components V and V and the calculated phase-to-phase and phase- to-ground, depending on the wye/delta mode, are switch-controlled too. 11.11.4 Signals Table 609: VSWI Input signals Name Type Default Description BUS_SW BOOLEAN 0=False Bus voltage selection Table 610:...
  • Page 831 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features Section 12 General function block features 12.1 Definite time characteristics 12.1.1 Definite time operation The DT mode is enabled when the Operating curve type setting is selected either as "ANSI Def. Time" or "IEC Def. Time". In the DT mode, the TRIP output of the function is activated when the time calculation exceeds the set Trip delay time.
  • Page 832 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features In case 1, the reset is delayed with the Reset delay time setting and in case 2, the counter is reset immediately, because the Reset delay time setting is set to zero. A070421-ANSI V1 EN Figure 421: Drop-off period is longer than the set Reset delay time...
  • Page 833 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070420-ANSI V1 EN Figure 422: Drop-off period is shorter than the set Reset delay time When the drop-off period is shorter than the set Reset delay time, as described in Figure 422, the input signal for the definite timer (here: timer input) is active, provided that the current is above the set Pickup value.
  • Page 834 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070422-ANSI V1 EN Figure 423: Operating effect of the BLOCK input when the selected blocking mode is "Freeze timer" If the BLOCK input is activated when the trip timer is running, as described in Figure 423, the timer is frozen during the time BLOCK remains active.
  • Page 835 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features 12.2 Current based inverse definite minimum time characteristics 12.2.1 IDMT curves for overcurrent protection In inverse-time modes, the trip time depends on the momentary value of the current: the higher the current, the faster the trip time. The trip time calculation or integration starts immediately when the current exceeds the set Pickup value and the PICKUP output is activated.
  • Page 836 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features GUID-20353F8B-2112-41CB-8F68-B51F8ACA775E V1 EN Figure 424: Operation time curve based on the IDMT characteristic leveled out with the Minimum operate time setting is set to 1000 milliseconds (the IDMT Sat point setting is set to maximum). 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 837 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features GUID-87A96860-4268-4AD1-ABA1-3227D3BB36D5 V1 EN Figure 425: Operation time curve based on the IDMT characteristic leveled out with IDMT Sat point setting value “11” (the Minimum operate time setting is set to minimum). 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 838 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features GUID-9BFD6DC5-08B5-4755-A899-DF5ED26E75F6 V1 EN Figure 426: Example of how the inverse time characteristic is leveled out with currents over 50 x In and the Setting Start value setting “2.5 x In”. (the IDMT Sat point setting is set to maximum and the Minimum operate time setting is set to minimum).
  • Page 839 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features The Minimum trip time setting defines the minimum trip time for the IDMT mode, that is, it is possible to limit the IDMT based trip time for not becoming too short. For example: GUID-B1A82AE1-A1DE-457E-B229-F0437336F3F6 V1 EN Figure 427: Trip time curves based on IDMT characteristic with the value of the...
  • Page 840 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features GUID-B1F693FA-DC13-4DFC-81F3-A47FF082492B V1 EN Figure 428: Trip time curves based on IDMT characteristic with the value of the Minimum trip time setting = 1 second 12.2.1.1 Standard inverse-time characteristics For inverse-time operation, both IEC and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse-time characteristics are supported.
  • Page 841 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features The trip times for the ANSI and IEC IDMT curves are defined with the coefficients A, B and C. The values of the coefficients can be calculated according to the formula:  ...
  • Page 842 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070750 V2 EN Figure 429: ANSI extremely inverse-time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 843 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070751 V2 EN Figure 430: ANSI very inverse-time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 844 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070752 V2 EN Figure 431: ANSI normal inverse-time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 845 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070753 V2 EN Figure 432: ANSI moderately inverse-time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 846 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070817 V2 EN Figure 433: ANSI long-time extremely inverse-time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 847 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070818 V2 EN Figure 434: ANSI long-time very inverse-time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 848 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070819 V2 EN Figure 435: ANSI long-time inverse-time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 849 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070820 V2 EN Figure 436: IEC normal inverse-time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 850 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070821 V2 EN Figure 437: IEC very inverse-time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 851 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070822 V2 EN Figure 438: IEC inverse-time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 852 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070823 V2 EN Figure 439: IEC extremely inverse-time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 853 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070824 V2 EN Figure 440: IEC short-time inverse-time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 854 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070825 V2 EN Figure 441: IEC long-time inverse-time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 855 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features 12.2.1.2 User-programmable inverse-time characteristics The user can define curves by entering parameters into the following standard formula:       ⋅      −   ...
  • Page 856 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features t[s] Trip time (in seconds) Time multiplier Measured current I> Pickup value 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 857 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070826 V2 EN Figure 442: RI-type inverse-time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 858 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070827 V2 EN Figure 443: RD-type inverse-time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 859 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features 12.2.2 Reset in inverse-time modes The user can select the reset characteristics by using the Type of reset curve setting. Table 613: Values for reset mode Setting name Possible values Type of reset curve 1=Immediate 2=Def time reset 3=Inverse reset...
  • Page 860 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features t[s] Reset time (in seconds) Time multiplier Measured current I> Pickup value Table 614: Coefficients for ANSI delayed inverse reset curves Curve name (1) ANSI Extremely Inverse 29.1 (2) ANSI Very Inverse 21.6 (3) ANSI Normal Inverse 0.46...
  • Page 861 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070828 V1 EN Figure 444: ANSI extremely inverse reset time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 862 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070829 V1 EN Figure 445: ANSI very inverse reset time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 863 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070830 V1 EN Figure 446: ANSI normal inverse reset time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 864 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070831 V1 EN Figure 447: ANSI moderately inverse reset time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 865 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070832 V1 EN Figure 448: ANSI long-time extremely inverse reset time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 866 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070833 V1 EN Figure 449: ANSI long-time very inverse reset time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 867 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features A070834 V1 EN Figure 450: ANSI long-time inverse reset time characteristics 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 868 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features The delayed inverse-time reset is not available for IEC-type inverse time curves. User-programmable delayed inverse reset The user can define the delayed inverse reset time characteristics with the following formula using the set Curve parameter D. ...
  • Page 869 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features Activating the BLOCK input alone does not affect the operation of the PICKUP output. It still becomes active when the current exceeds the set Pickup value, and inactive when the current falls below the set Pickup value and the set Reset delay time has expired. 12.3 Voltage based inverse definite minimum time characteristics...
  • Page 870 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features GUID-BCFE3F56-BFA8-4BCC-8215-30C089C80EAD-ANSI V1 EN Figure 451: Trip time curve based on IDMT characteristic with Minimum trip time set to 0.5 second 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 871 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features GUID-90BAEB05-E8FB-4F8A-8F07-E110DD63FCCF-ANSI V1 EN Figure 452: Trip time curve based on IDMT characteristic with Minimum trip time set to 1 second 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 872 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features 12.3.1.1 Standard inverse-time characteristics for overvoltage protection The trip times for the standard overvoltage IDMT curves are defined with the coefficients A, B, C, D and E. The inverse trip time can be calculated with the formula: ⋅...
  • Page 873 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features GUID-ACF4044C-052E-4CBD-8247-C6ABE3796FA6-ANSI V1 EN Figure 453: Inverse curve A characteristic of overvoltage protection 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 874 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features GUID-F5E0E1C2-48C8-4DC7-A84B-174544C09142-ANSI V1 EN Figure 454: Inverse curve B characteristic of overvoltage protection 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 875 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features GUID-A9898DB7-90A3-47F2-AEF9-45FF148CB679-ANSI V1 EN Figure 455: Inverse curve C characteristic of overvoltage protection 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 876 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features 12.3.1.2 User programmable inverse-time characteristics for overvoltage protection The user can define the curves by entering the parameters using the standard formula: ⋅       − >  ...
  • Page 877 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features 12.3.2 IDMT curves for undervoltage protection In the inverse-time modes, the trip time depends on the momentary value of the voltage, the lower the voltage, the faster the trip time. The trip time calculation or integration starts immediately when the voltage goes below the set value of the Pickup value setting and the PICKUP output is activated.
  • Page 878 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features GUID-35F40C3B-B483-40E6-9767-69C1536E3CBC-ANSI V1 EN Figure 456: : Inverse curve A characteristic of undervoltage protection 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 879 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features GUID-B55D0F5F-9265-4D9A-A7C0-E274AA3A6BB1-ANSI V1 EN Figure 457: Inverse curve B characteristic of undervoltage protection 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 880 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features 12.3.2.2 User-programmable inverse-time characteristics for undervoltage protection The user can define curves by entering parameters into the standard formula: ⋅       < −   × − ...
  • Page 881 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features 12.4 Frequency measurement and protection All the function blocks that use frequency quantity as their input signal share the common features related to the frequency measurement algorithm. The frequency estimation is done from one phase (phase-to-phase or phase voltage) or from the positive phase sequence (PPS).
  • Page 882 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features the fundamental frequency measurement the suppression of harmonics is at least -50 dB at the frequency range of f= n x fn, where n = 2, 3, 4, 5,... The RMS measurement principle is selected with the Measurement mode setting using the value "RMS".
  • Page 883 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features Peak-to-peak with peak backup The peak-to-peak with peak backup measurement principle is selected with the Measurement mode setting using the value "P-to-P+backup". It is similar to the peak-to- peak mode, with the exception that it has been enhanced with the peak backup. In the peak- to-peak with peak backup mode, the function starts with two conditions: the peak-to-peak value is above the set pickup current or the peak value is above two times the set Pickup value.
  • Page 884 Section 12 1MAC504801-IB E General function block features + ⋅ ⋅ (Equation 123) GUID-7A6B6AAD-8DDC-4663-A72F-A3715BF3E56A-ANSI V1 EN ⋅ + ⋅ (Equation 124) GUID-6FAAFCC1-AF25-4A0A-8D9B-FC2FD0BCFB21-ANSI V1 EN When VT connection is selected as “Delta”, the positive and negative phase sequence voltage components are calculated from the phase-to-phase voltages according to the equations: −...
  • Page 885 Section 13 1MAC504801-IB E Requirements for measurement transformers Section 13 Requirements for measurement transformers 13.1 Current transformers 13.1.1 Current transformer requirements for non-directional overcurrent protection For reliable and correct operation of the overcurrent protection, the CT has to be chosen carefully.
  • Page 886 Section 13 1MAC504801-IB E Requirements for measurement transformers The accuracy classes 5P and 10P are both suitable for non-directional overcurrent protection. The 5P class provides a better accuracy. This should be noted also if there are accuracy requirements for the metering functions (current metering, power metering, and so on) of the protection relay.
  • Page 887 Section 13 1MAC504801-IB E Requirements for measurement transformers Recommended pickup current settings If I is the lowest primary current at which the highest set overcurrent stage is to trip, kmin the pickup current should be set using the formula: Current pickup value < 0.7 x (I kmin is the nominal primary current of the CT.
  • Page 888 Section 13 1MAC504801-IB E Requirements for measurement transformers 13.1.1.3 Example for non-directional overcurrent protection The following figure describes a typical medium voltage feeder. The protection is implemented as three-stage definite time non-directional overcurrent protection. A071142-ANSI V2 EN Figure 458: Example of three-stage overcurrent protection The maximum three-phase fault current is 41.7 kA and the minimum three-phase short circuit current is 22.8 kA.
  • Page 889 Section 13 1MAC504801-IB E Requirements for measurement transformers recommended that all the CTs have an identical constructions, that is, they have an equal burden and characteristics and are of the same type, preferably from the same manufacturing batch. If the CT characteristics and burden values are not equal, calculations for each branch in the scheme should be performed separately and the worst- case results should be used.
  • Page 890 Section 13 1MAC504801-IB E Requirements for measurement transformers (Equation 133) GUID-FA89F7B0-661F-4FBF-ABFC-5EC3A256F8EE V1 EN the highest through-fault current in primary amps. The highest earth fault or short circuit current during kmax the out-of-zone fault. the turns ratio of the CT the secondary internal resistance of the CT in ohms the resistance (maximum of R ) of the CT secondary circuit in ohms The current transformers must be able to force enough current to operate the protection...
  • Page 891 Section 13 1MAC504801-IB E Requirements for measurement transformers a few tens of watts because of the possible CT inaccuracy which might cause some current through the stabilizing resistor in a normal load situation. If V is high or V is low, a resistor with a higher power rating is needed. The resistor manufacturers often allow 10 times rated power for five seconds.
  • Page 892 Section 13 1MAC504801-IB E Requirements for measurement transformers The choice of the CT also specifies R The required V is calculated with Equation 56. If V of the CT is not high enough, another CT has to be selected. The value of the V is given by the manufacturer in the case of Class X current transformers or it can be estimated with Equation...
  • Page 893 Section 13 1MAC504801-IB E Requirements for measurement transformers ⋅ ≈ ⋅ (Equation 139) GUID-A9BE50E9-5524-4A5A-8749-9FCAD94E16BB V1 EN the maximum fault current inside the zone, in primary amps kmaxin the turns ration of the CT the internal resistance of the CT in ohms the resistance of the longest loop of the CT secondary circuit in ohms the resistance of the stabilized resistor in ohms Next, the peak voltage û, which includes the CT saturation, is estimated with...
  • Page 895 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections Section 14 Protection relay's physical connections 14.1 Connections to the rear panel terminals All external circuits are connected to the terminals on the rear panel of the protection relay. • Each signal connector terminal is connected with one 14 or 16 Gauge wire. For CB trip circuit, 12 or 14 Gauge wire is used.
  • Page 896 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections 14.2 Protective ground connections GUID-F8DEDEBF-0193-4E5D-A317-DA79C38D5B2B V1 EN Figure 460: The protective ground screw is located between connectors X100 and X105. The ground lead must be at least a 10 Gauge wire. If the length of the ground lead is long, the cross section of the wire must be increased.
  • Page 897 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections Depending on order code, several rear port communication connections are available. • Galvanic RJ-45 Ethernet connection • Optical LC Ethernet connection • ST-type glass fibre serial connection • EIA-485 serial connection • EIA-232 serial connection Fibre optic equipment and cables are very sensitive to dust and dirt.
  • Page 898 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections 14.3.2 Ethernet rear connections The Ethernet communication module is provided with either galvanic RJ-45 connection or optical multimode LC type connection depending on the product variant and selected communication interface option. A shielded twisted-pair cable CAT 5e is used with RJ-45, and an optical cable (≤...
  • Page 899 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections 14.3.5 Optical ST serial rear connection Serial communication can be used optionally through an optical connection either in loop or star topology. The connection idle state is light on or light off. 14.3.6 Communication interfaces and protocols The communication protocols supported depend on the optional rear communication...
  • Page 900 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections 14.3.7 Rear communication modules COM0001 COM0002 COM0005 COM0006 COM0011 COM0012 RJ-45 RJ-45+ARC LC+ARC RJ-45+RS485+ LC+RS485+ IRIG-B IRIG-B GUID-D3DDEF08-CC2F-46B6-BB8E-4F0BCC392804 V1 EN Figure 461: Communication module options COM0001…COM0012 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 901 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections COM0013 COM0014 COM0023 COM0032 COM0033 COM0034 2xLC+RJ-45+ RJ-45+RS485+ LC+RS485+ RJ-45+ 3xRJ-45+ LC+2xRJ-45+ ST+ARC IRIG-B+ARC IRIG-B+ARC RS232/485+ ST+ARC ST+ARC RS485+ST+ IRIG-B GUID-377179DA-7D96-4B5A-997F-F4F461925710 V2 EN Figure 462: Communication module options COM00013…COM0034 Table 619: Station bus communication interfaces included in communication modules Module ID RJ-45 EIA-485...
  • Page 902 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections Module ID RJ-45 EIA-485 EIA-232 COM0032 COM0033 COM0034 1) Available in REM620 Ver.2.1 only Table 620: LED descriptions for COM0001-COM0014 Connector Description LAN link status and activity (RJ-45 and LC) COM2 2-wire/4-wire receive activity COM2 2-wire/4-wire transmit activity COM1 2-wire receive activity COM1 2-wire transmit activity...
  • Page 903 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections 14.3.7.1 COM0001-COM0014 jumper locations and connections A070893 V2 EN Figure 463: Jumper connectors on communication module 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 904 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections Table 623: 2-wire EIA-485 jumper connectors Group Jumper connection Description Notes A+ bias enabled COM2 2-wire connection A+ bias disabled B- bias enabled B- bias disabled Bus termination enabled Bus termination disabled B- bias enabled COM1 2-wire connection...
  • Page 905 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections It is recommended to enable biasing only at one end of the bus. Termination is enabled at each end of the bus. It is recommended to ground the signal directly to ground from one node and through capacitor from other nodes.
  • Page 906 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections Table 626: Configuration options of the two independent communication ports COM1 connector X6 COM2 connector X5 or X12 EIA-232 Optical ST (X12) EIA-485 2-wire EIA-485 2-wire (X5) EIA-485 4-wire EIA-485 4-wire (X5) 1 2 3 X 13 X 15...
  • Page 907 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections Table 627: EIA-232 and EIA-485 jumper connectors for COM1 Group Jumper connection Description 1–2 EIA-485 2–3 EIA-232 1–2 EIA-485 2–3 EIA-232 1–2 EIA-485 2–3 EIA-232 1–2 EIA-485 2–3 EIA-232 To ensure fail-safe operation, the bus is to be biased at one end using the pull-up and pull- down resistors on the communication module.
  • Page 908 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections Group Jumper connection Description Notes 1–2 A+ bias enabled 4-wire RX channel 2–3 A+ bias disabled 1–2 B- bias enabled 2–3 B- bias disabled 1–2 Bus termination enabled 2–3 Bus termination disabled 1) Default setting COM2 port connection can be either EIA-485 or optical ST.
  • Page 909 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections Table 633: X12 Optical ST connection Group Jumper connection Description 1–2 Star topology 2–3 Loop topology 1–2 Idle state = Light on 2–3 Idle state = Light off Table 634: EIA-232 connections for COM0023 (X6) EIA-232 AGND Table 635:...
  • Page 910 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections 14.3.7.3 COM0033-COM0034 jumper locations and connections The optional communication modules include support for optical ST serial communication (X9 connector). The fibre-optic ST connection uses the COM1 port. GUID-4CAF22E5-1491-44EF-BFC7-45017DED68F4 V1 EN Figure 465: Jumper connections on communication module COM0033 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 911 Section 14 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay's physical connections GUID-E54674FD-2E7F-4742-90AB-505772A0CFF4 V1 EN Figure 466: Jumper connections on communication module COM0034 Table 637: X9 Optical ST jumper connectors Group Jumper connection Description Star topology Loop topology Idle state = Light on Idle state = Light off 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 913 Section 15 1MAC504801-IB E Technical data Section 15 Technical data Table 638: Dimensions Description Value Width Frame 10.32 inches (262.2 mm) Case 9.69 inches (246 mm) Height Frame 6.97 inches (177 mm), 4U Case 6.30 inches (160 mm) Depth 7.91 inches (201 mm) Weight Complete protection relay max.
  • Page 914 Section 15 1MAC504801-IB E Technical data Table 640: Energizing inputs Description Value Rated frequency 50/60 Hz Current inputs Rated current, I 0.2/1 A 1/5 A Thermal withstand capability: • Continuously 20 A • For 1 s 100 A 500 A Dynamic current withstand: •...
  • Page 915 Section 15 1MAC504801-IB E Technical data Table 642: RTD/mA inputs Description Value RTD inputs Supported RTD 100 Ω platinum TCR 0.00385 (DIN 43760) sensors 250 Ω platinum TCR 0.00385 100 Ω nickel TCR 0.00618 (DIN 43760) 120 Ω nickel TCR 0.00618 250 Ω...
  • Page 916 Section 15 1MAC504801-IB E Technical data Table 644: Signal outputs and IRF output Description Value Rated voltage 250 V AC/DC Continuous contact carry Make and carry for 3.0 s 10 A Make and carry 0.5 s 15 A Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time 1 A/0.25 A/0.15 A constant L/R <40 ms, at 48/110/220 V DC Minimum contact load...
  • Page 917 Section 15 1MAC504801-IB E Technical data Description Value Make and carry for 0.5 s 30 A Breaking capacity when the control-circuit time 1A/0.25A/0.15A constant L/R < 40 ms, at 48/110/220 V DC (two contacts connected in series) Minimum contact load 100 mA at 24 V AC/DC Trip-circuit monitoring (TCM): •...
  • Page 918 Section 15 1MAC504801-IB E Technical data Table 649: Ethernet interfaces Ethernet Protocol Cable Data transfer rate interface Front TCP/IP Standard Ethernet CAT 5 cable 10 MBits/s with RJ-45 connector Rear TCP/IP Shielded twisted pair CAT 5e cable 100 MBits/s with RJ-45 connector or fibre-optic cable with LC connector Table 650: Serial rear interface...
  • Page 919 Section 15 1MAC504801-IB E Technical data Table 653: Lens sensor and optical fibre for arc flash detector Description Value Fibre-optic cable including lens 1.5 m, 3.0 m or 5.0 m Normal service temperature range of the lens -40...+100°C Maximum service temperature range of the lens, +140°C max.
  • Page 921 Section 16 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay and functionality tests Section 16 Protection relay and functionality tests Table 656: Electromagnetic compatibility tests Description Requirement Reference 1 MHz/100 kHz burst disturbance IEC60255-22-1, Class III test, all ports IEC61000-4-18 IEEE37.90.1-2002 • Differential mode ±2.5 kV •...
  • Page 922 Section 16 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay and functionality tests Description Requirement Reference Emission tests IEC 60255-25 EN 55011, class A • Conducted 0.15…0.50 MHz • <79 dB (μV) quasi peak • <66 dB (μV) average 0.5…30 MHz • <73 dB (μV) quasi peak •...
  • Page 923 Section 16 1MAC504801-IB E Protection relay and functionality tests Table 658: Insulation tests Description Requirement Reference Dielectric tests 2.8 kV DC, 1 min IEEE C37.90-2005 700 V, DC, 1 min for signal circuit and communication 2 kV AC 50 Hz, 1 min IEC 60255-5 500 V AC 50 Hz, 1 min for communication...
  • Page 925 Section 17 1MAC504801-IB E Applicable standards and regulations Section 17 Applicable standards and regulations EMC council directive 2004/108/EC EU directive 2002/96/EC/175 IEC 60255 IEEE C37.90.1-2002 IEEE C37.90.2-2004 IEEE C37.90.3-2001 IEEE C37.90-2005 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 927 Section 18 1MAC504801-IB E Glossary Section 18 Glossary 100BASE-FX A physical medium defined in the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standard for local area networks (LANs) that uses fiber optic cabling 100BASE-TX A physical medium defined in the IEEE 802.3 Ethernet standard for local area networks (LANs) that uses twisted- pair cabling category 5 or higher with RJ-45 connectors Alternating current 1.
  • Page 928 Section 18 1MAC504801-IB E Glossary DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DNP3 A distributed network protocol originally developed by Westronic. The DNP3 Users Group has the ownership of the protocol and assumes responsibility for its evolution. Double-point control Data set ready Definite time Data terminal ready EEPROM...
  • Page 929 Section 18 1MAC504801-IB E Glossary IP address A set of four numbers between 0 and 255, separated by periods. Each server connected to the Internet is assigned a unique IP address that specifies the location for the TCP/ IP protocol. 1.
  • Page 930 Section 18 1MAC504801-IB E Glossary Pulse per second Parallel redundancy protocol Random access memory Also known as MTA or base angle. Characteristic angle. RJ-45 Galvanic connector type Root-mean-square (value) Read-only memory RSTP Rapid spanning tree protocol Real-time clock Resistance temperature detector Ready to send Single attached node Select-before-operate...
  • Page 931 Section 18 1MAC504801-IB E Glossary Wide area network WHMI Web human-machine interface 620 series ANSI Technical Manual...
  • Page 932 — ABB Distribution Solutions Distribution Automation P.O. Box 699 FI-65101 VAASA, Finland Phone +358 10 22 11 ABB Inc. 655 Century Point Lake Mary, FL 32746, USA Phone +1-800-222 1946 www.abb.com/mediumvoltage www.abb.com/relion www.abb.com/substationautomation © Copyright 2019 ABB. All rights reserved.

Table of Contents